JP7226867B1 - playground - Google Patents

Abstract

An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine that executes a novel performance that has never existed before. Kind Code: A1 A game machine provided with operation means provided at a position operable by a player, notification means capable of executing a first notification, and notification means capable of executing a notification, wherein: The first notification is a notification that suggests an operation recommended for the operation of the operation means, and the notification means is the first in a game in which an operation different from the recommended operation is performed (hereinafter, "first game"). , and the notice means may execute the notice in the first game in which the first notice is executed (hereinafter, "first case"), and the notice means, in the first case The executed notice is continuously executed even after the first notification is executed. [Selection drawing] Fig. 10

Description

The present invention relates to amusement machines typified by slot machines (pachislot game machines) and pachinko machines (ball game machines).

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, for example, a slot machine is known as one of game machines. This slot machine rotates the reels by inserting medals and operating the start lever, determines the role internally by internal lottery, and stops the reels by operating the stop button. It is configured such that a winning combination is established when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed according to internal determination. When a winning combination involving the payout of medals is established, a specified number of medals corresponding to the established winning combination is paid out.

Some of such gaming machines provide an effect in which information regarding the operation of a stop button that derives a stop mode that is advantageous to the player is announced (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-087308 A

However, there is still room for improvement in the effects executed by such game machines.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a novel performance that has never existed before.

In order to achieve the above object, the game machine according to the present invention, as one aspect thereof,
a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are applied and driven to rotate ;
a plurality of operating means provided at positions operable by the player;
an informing means capable of executing the first informing;
A game machine equipped with an announcement means capable of executing an announcement,
The plurality of operating means are stop operation receiving means capable of receiving a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels,
the first notification is a notification suggesting an operation recommended for operation of the plurality of operation means;
The notification means is means for starting the first notification in a game in which an operation different from the recommended operation is performed,
The notification means is means for starting the first notification in relation to the first stopping operation of the plurality of reels,
The notifying means is means for terminating the first notifying in relation to the fact that all of the plurality of reels have been stopped,
There is a case where the first notification is started in the game in which the notice is started (hereinafter referred to as "first case"),
The notice means is a means for continuously executing the notice that has been executed in the first case even after the first notice is started ,
In the first case, the notification means, after the first notification is started, when the power is cut off while at least one of the plurality of reels is rotating, and then the power is restored (hereinafter referred to as , referred to as "second case"), means for resuming the first notification in at least a part of the period from the power-off game to the next game input operation,
It is characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that executes a novel production that has never existed before.

1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 4 is a circuit block diagram of a control section of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. (a) is a plan view showing an array of symbols provided on reels of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and (b) is a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, payouts and operations. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing by a main control unit of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of main controller timer interrupt processing of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of first sub-controller main processing, first sub-controller command reception interrupt processing, and first sub-controller timer interrupt processing of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. Flow of second sub-controller main processing, second sub-controller command reception interrupt processing, second sub-controller timer interrupt processing, and second sub-controller image control processing of slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention It is a flow chart showing. FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of effects displayed on the effect image display device in Example A1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, (A) is a game in which the advance notice effect in the normal state is not executed; [Fig. 10] is a diagram for explaining an effect when a recommended stop operation is performed in a game in which a normal state notice effect is executed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect displayed on the effect image display device in Example A1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the invention, in the case where an unrecommended stop operation is performed in a game in which the advance notice effect in the normal state is not executed; It is a figure explaining the production|presentation of. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect displayed on the effect image display device in Example A1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the invention, wherein an unrecommended stop operation is performed in a game in which a normal state notice effect is executed; It is a figure explaining the production|presentation in the case of. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an effect displayed on the effect image display device in Example A1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, and together with FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an effect when a stop operation is performed and power is cut off/returned; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of an effect displayed on the effect image display device in Example A1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, and together with FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an effect when a stop operation is performed and power is cut off/returned; FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of an effect displayed on the effect image display device in Example A1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, FIG. and, in a game in which operation navigation is executed, a diagram for explaining an effect when a stop operation that does not comply with the notified operation content is performed, and (B) is a diagram for explaining an effect when a two-coin bet game is executed in a normal state. , is a diagram for explaining the effect when the two-coin bet notification is executed. FIG. 10 is a table schematically showing the contents of an AT lottery in Example A2 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing transition of a game state (AT-based game state) of Example A2 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect displayed on the effect image display device in Example A2 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, showing a state transition of normal state→first AT state→chance zone→normal state. It is a figure explaining the production|presentation of a case. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of effects displayed on the effect image display device in Example A2 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, and together with FIGS. 18 and 19, normal state → first AT state → chance zone → It is a figure explaining the production|presentation at the time of state transition of specialized zone -> 2nd AT state -> chance zone -> normal state. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of effects displayed on the effect image display device in Example A2 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, and together with FIGS. 17 and 19, normal state → first AT state → chance zone → It is a figure explaining the production|presentation at the time of state transition of specialized zone -> 2nd AT state -> chance zone -> normal state. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of effects displayed on the effect image display device in Example A2 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, and together with FIGS. 17 and 18, normal state → first AT state → chance zone → It is a figure explaining the production|presentation at the time of state transition of specialized zone -> 2nd AT state -> chance zone -> normal state. 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 4 is a circuit block diagram of a control section of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. (a) is a plan view showing an array of symbols provided on reels of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and (b) is a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, payouts and operations. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing by a main control unit of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of main controller timer interrupt processing of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of first sub-controller main processing, first sub-controller command reception interrupt processing, and first sub-controller timer interrupt processing of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. Flow of second sub-controller main processing, second sub-controller command reception interrupt processing, second sub-controller timer interrupt processing, and second sub-controller image control processing of slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention It is a flow chart showing. (a) A schematic diagram (front view) showing the main parts of the slot machine 100. FIG. (b) is a diagram showing a display example of the menu screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 in the setting change/setting confirmation mode and a display example of the LED board 101a arranged inside the main body 101. FIG. (c) is a diagram showing a display example when the item of operation check MC is provisionally selected on the menu screen. (d) is a diagram showing a display example after the OK button 193a is pressed with the operation check MC item provisionally selected. (a) is a diagram showing a display example after the OK button 193a is pressed with the LED check LC item provisionally selected on the operation check menu screen MCM. (b) is a diagram showing a display example after the OK button 193a is pressed while the item of the upper area AE is provisionally selected on the LED check area menu screen LEM. (c) A diagram showing a display example after the OK button 193a is pressed with the item of the center area CE provisionally selected on the LED check area menu screen LEM. (d) is a diagram showing a display example after the OK button 193a is pressed with the item of the lower area UE temporarily selected on the ED check area menu screen LEM. (a) is a diagram showing a display example after the OK button 193a is pressed with the speaker check item SC provisionally selected on the operation check menu screen MCM. (b), (c) In the setting change/setting confirmation mode, with the door open, it is the figure which showed the flow until the LED check of an upper area|region is selected in a time series. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing the flow in chronological order until the LED check of the upper area is selected with the door open in the setting change/setting confirmation mode. (c) In the LED check area menu screen LEM, the OK button 193a is pressed while the item in the upper area AE is provisionally selected. (d) is a diagram showing the flow in chronological order from when the LED check of the upper area is selected in the door closed state until the door is closed and the LED check of the upper area is executed. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing the flow in chronological order from when the LED check of the upper area is selected in the door closed state until the door is closed and the LED check of the upper area is executed. . (c) and (d) are diagrams showing the flow in chronological order from when the LED check for the central area is selected during the LED check for the upper area to when the LED check for the central area is executed in the door closed state. is. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing the flow in chronological order from when the LED check for the central area is selected during the LED check for the upper area to when the LED check for the central area is executed in the door closed state. is. (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the door is opened while the central area LED check is being performed with the door closed. (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the door is closed while the central region LED check is being performed with the door open. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing the flow from the selection of the LED check for the lower area to the execution of the LED check for the lower area during the execution of the LED check for the central area (door closed). (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the door is opened while the LED check of the lower area is being performed with the door closed. (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the speaker check SC item is provisionally selected on the operation check menu screen MCM. (b) to (d) are diagrams showing display examples after the OK button 193a is pressed with the speaker check item SC provisionally selected on the operation check menu screen MCM. (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the door is closed while the speaker check is being performed with the door open. (b) to (d) show the flow from the execution of the lever operation for confirming the setting during the execution of the LED check (door open) in the central area until the front door 102 is closed before the setting key is returned. It is a diagram. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing the flow until the front door 102 is closed after the setting key is returned during execution of the LED check (door opening) of the central area. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram (front view) showing the main parts of the slot machine 100 in the two-coin bet recommended game. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram (front view) showing the main parts of the slot machine 100 in the two-coin bet recommended game. (a) A schematic diagram (front view) showing the main parts of the slot machine 100 in a two-coin bet game. (b) to (d) are schematic diagrams (front views) showing the main parts of the slot machine 100 in the three-coin bet recommended game. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram (front view) showing main parts of the slot machine 100 in a game recommended to bet 3 coins; (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the power is turned on with the front door 102 opened and the setting key provided inside the main body 101 turned on. b) A diagram showing a display example when the item of system volume setting SS is provisionally selected on the menu screen. (c) A diagram showing a display example after the OK button 193a is pressed with the item of the system volume setting SS provisionally selected. 8A and 8B are diagrams showing display examples when the power saving mode setting EM item is provisionally selected on the menu screen returned from the system volume setting; FIG. (c) A diagram showing a display example after the OK button 193a is pressed with the item of power saving mode setting EM provisionally selected. (d) A diagram showing a display example of a state in which the power saving mode setting ON is temporarily selected on the power saving mode setting screen EMM. (a) It is the figure which showed the example of a display of the state by which the power saving mode setting ON was set. 8B and 8C are diagrams showing display examples when the item of system volume setting SS is provisionally selected on the menu screen returned from the power saving mode setting; FIG. (d) A diagram showing a display example after the OK button 193a is pressed with the item of the system volume setting SS provisionally selected. (a) is a diagram showing a display example after the administrator setting volume is changed to volume 1 on the system volume screen SSM and the OK button 193a is pressed. 8B and 8C are diagrams showing display examples when the power saving mode setting EM item is temporarily selected on the menu screen returned from the system volume setting; FIG. (d) A diagram showing a display example after the OK button 193a is pressed with the item of power saving mode setting EM provisionally selected. (a) is a diagram showing a display example of a state in which power saving mode setting OFF is provisionally selected on the power saving mode setting screen EMM. (b) is a diagram showing a display example in a state where the power saving mode setting is turned off. (c) and (d) are diagrams showing display examples when the item of system volume setting SS is provisionally selected on the menu screen returned from the power saving mode setting. (a) is a diagram showing a display example after the OK button 193a is pressed with the item of the system volume setting SS provisionally selected. 1(a) is a schematic diagram (front view) of main parts extracting and showing notification means provided in the slot machine 100. FIG. (b)-(f) It is a diagram showing an example of various notifications in chronological order until the transition to the normal game after the operation check and the setting change are executed in the setting change mode. It is a diagram showing an example of various notifications in chronological order until the transition to the normal game after the operation check and the setting change are executed in the setting change mode. (a) ~ (c) It is a diagram showing an example of various notifications in chronological order until the transition to the normal game after the operation check and the setting change are executed in the setting change mode. (d) ~ (f) It is a diagram showing an example of various notifications in chronological order until the transition to the normal game after the operation check and setting confirmation are executed in the setting confirmation mode. After the operation check and setting confirmation are executed in the setting confirmation mode, it is a diagram showing an example of various notifications in chronological order until the normal game is started. After the operation check and setting confirmation are executed in the setting confirmation mode, it is a diagram showing an example of various notifications in chronological order until the normal game is started. It is the figure which showed an example of various information in a time series until it transfers to a normal game state (demonstration screen) after setting change is complete|finished in setting change mode. (a) is a front view showing a state in which the movable body KT has moved to an upper limit position (second position); (b) is a front view showing a state in which the movable body KT has moved to the lower limit position (first position); (c) to (f) show an example of the first motion of the movable body KT when the movable body KT is positioned at the lower limit position (first position) before the power is turned on (first case) in chronological order. It is a diagram. (g) to (h) are diagrams showing an example of the second motion of the movable body KT in chronological order. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing an example of the second motion of the movable body KT in chronological order. (e) to (h) When the front door 102 is closed and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state (second state), the power is turned on while the movable body KT is at the lower limit position (first position). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the motion of the movable body KT in time series. (a) to (c) When the front door 102 is closed and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state (second state), the power is turned on while the movable body KT is at the lower limit position (first position). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the motion of the movable body KT in time series. (d) to (g) show an example of the first motion of the movable body KT when the movable body KT is not positioned at the lower limit position (first position) before the power is turned on (the second case) in chronological order. It is a diagram. (a) to (f) show an example of the first motion of the movable body KT when the movable body KT is not positioned at the lower limit position (first position) before the power is turned on (second case) in chronological order. It is a diagram. (a) to (f) When the front door 102 is closed and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state (second state), the movable body KT is at a position other than the lower limit position (first position) and the upper limit position (second position). 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body KT in chronological order when the power is turned on while the movable body KT is located at the position (third position). FIG. (a) to (e) When the front door 102 is in the closed state and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state (second state), the power is turned on while the movable body KT is at the upper limit position (second position). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the motion of the movable body KT in time series when the (a) to (g) are diagrams showing an example of the motion of the movable body KT during the normal game in chronological order. (a) to (h) are diagrams showing an example of the operation of the movable body KT in time series when the door is opened during the operation of the movable body KT. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body KT in time series when the door is opened during the operation of the movable body KT. (b) to (f) are diagrams showing modification examples of the motion of the movable body KT in chronological order. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. FIG. 1(a) is a schematic diagram (front view) of main parts extracting and showing notification means provided in the slot machine 100. FIG. (b) It is the figure which showed the example of a display by the main board display device 190. FIG. (c) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of error notification when a door open error occurs. (a) It is the figure which showed an example of the error alert|reporting at the time of door opening error occurrence. (b) to (f) are diagrams showing an example of error notification when a hopper error occurs. (a) to (f) are diagrams showing an example of error notification when a hopper error occurs. (a) to (f) are diagrams showing an example of elimination of a hopper error by door reset in chronological order. (a) to (f) are diagrams showing an example of an error notification of a hopper error in the case of shifting to a setting change mode in chronological order. (a) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of an error notification of a hopper error in the case of shifting to a setting change mode in chronological order. (a) to (f) are diagrams showing an example of an error notification of a hopper error in the case of shifting to a setting confirmation mode in chronological order. (a) It is the figure which showed an example of the error notification of the hopper error in the time series when it transfers to setting confirmation mode. (a) to (f) are diagrams showing an example of a setting change operation in a normal setting change mode in chronological order. (a) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of a setting change operation in a normal setting change mode in chronological order. (c) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of a setting confirmation operation in a normal setting confirmation mode in chronological order. (a) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of a setting confirmation operation in a normal setting confirmation mode in chronological order. (c) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of setting change modes by operating setting keys after power-on in chronological order. (a) to (f) are diagrams showing an example of a setting change mode by operating a setting key after power-on in chronological order.

An embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

[Embodiment A]
In the slot machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of reels, into which a predetermined number of game media are inserted and on which a plurality of types of symbols are respectively applied, start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the receipt of the rotation start instructing operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of wins is determined by a lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instructing operation, If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if not, the game medium is discarded. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.
[Example A1]

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of the game table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed in the center of the main body 101 and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, generally three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the reel window 113 when viewed from the player, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating each pattern displayed on the reel window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. and a light-receiving portion, a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated. The valid winning line 114 is determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five winning lines 114 . For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal prize line will be valid, and if two medals are bet, three lines will be valid with the addition of the upper horizontal prize line and the lower horizontal prize line, and the medal will be awarded. When 3 coins are bet, 5 lines obtained by adding a lower right pay line and an upper right pay line may be effective as pay lines. The number of pay lines 114 is not limited to 5. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, the right Five lines, ie, a downward pay line and an upward pay line may be set as valid pay lines, or the same number of pay lines may be uniformly set as valid pay lines regardless of the number of bets.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (more specifically, a bonus combination) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. be. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up. Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, a game in which three medals are inserted may be referred to as a "three-bet game", and a game in which two medals are inserted may be referred to as a "two-bet game".

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be electronically inserted (bet operation) by the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141. It means including

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an effect device that notifies information about the stop operation (for example, the operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110 to 112. . More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating a stop button 137 (sometimes referred to as a left stop button), and operating a stop button 138 (sometimes referred to as a middle stop button). The middle reel 111 can be stopped by doing so, and the right reel 112 can be stopped by operating a stop button 139 (sometimes referred to as a right stop button).

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be called the first stop reel, the reel to be stopped by the second stop operation may be called the second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped by the third stop operation may be called the third stop reel. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137-139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110-112 is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the middle reel 111 as the first stop reel is called " The operation sequence for the stopping operation with the right reel 112 as the first stop reel is called the "reverse pressing operation sequence" or simply "reverse pressing". In addition, in this embodiment, the stop operation and the operation order by the combination of the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation may be abbreviated. For example, the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is "left", the left reel 110 is the first stop reel, the middle reel 111 is the second stop reel, and the right reel 112 is the third stop reel. It is written as "left center right". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be lit to inform the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (on the side of the player). It is a structure that appears.

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as a effect device that executes effects described later.

The effect button 192 is a button that can be operated when executing a predetermined effect. For example, based on the operation of the effect button 192, an effect suggesting the provision of a privilege may be executed.

It should be noted that, even if the display device is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen is rectangular, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control part>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and stopping of the reels. A ROM 306 for storing positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A WDT (watch dog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a random number generation circuit 316 that is activated when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). ).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, The state of the index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, the effect button 192 sensor, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detects a put operation when The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, the L become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (win line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, accumulated number display 125, game information A driving circuit 328 for driving the indicator 126 and the payout number indicator 127 is provided.

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output. In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 detects that the voltage value of the power supply is a predetermined value (this embodiment). 9v), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. Signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. there is This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. are doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like. are provided.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is connected to various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input/output interface. 123, etc.) are connected.

A drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163 is provided in the first sub-control section 400, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. A timer 512 is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The second sub-controller 500 also has a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the second sub-controller 500 as a whole, image display data, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
The pattern arrangement applied to each reel 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 3(a). In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of the symbols applied to each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (21 frames numbered 0 to 20 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (eight types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in the present embodiment, the number 1 piece on the left reel 110 has a "replay" symbol, the number 0 piece on the middle reel 111 has a "bell" symbol, and the number 2 piece on the right reel 112 has a "replay" symbol. "Watermelon" pattern is placed on each.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3(b), the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described. The figure shows the types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the activation or payout of each winning combination. Of the winning combinations in this embodiment, the big bonus (BB1, BB2) and the regular bonus (RB) are bonus combinations that shift to the bonus game, and the replay (replay) is repeated without inserting new medals. Winning hands may be distinguished from winning hands and may be called "working hands" as the hands that can be played. is included. In addition, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the working combination that does not accompany the payout of medals (does not accompany the payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. Bonuses and prizes for replays are included.

Winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include big bonuses (BB1, BB2), regular bonuses (RB), small combinations (cherry, watermelon, bell), and replays. It goes without saying that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

"Big bonus (BB1, BB2)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "BB") is a special combination (operating combination) in which a big bonus game (BB game) is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combinations are "BB1 symbol (also referred to as white 7)-BB1 symbol-BB1 symbol" for BB1 and "BB2 symbol (also referred to as blue 7)-BB2 symbol-BB2 symbol" for BB2. Further, the flag carryover is performed for BB1 and BB2. That is, when BB1 or BB2 is internally won, a flag indicating this is set (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). The state in which the flag indicating internal winning is set is maintained until the next game and thereafter, BB1 and BB2 are internally winning, and the symbol combination "white 7-white 7-white 7" corresponding to BB1 and the symbol corresponding to BB2. The combination "blue 7-blue 7-blue 7" is in a winning state.

"Regular bonus (RB)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "RB") is a special role (operating role) in which a regular bonus game (RB game) is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combination is "RB symbol (also called bonus)-RB symbol-RB symbol". It should be noted that flag carrying over is performed for RB in the same manner as for BB described above. However, in the big bonus game (BB game), the start of the big bonus game is not based on the internal winning of the regular bonus game (RB game) or the display of the symbol combination on the winning line. A regular bonus game may be started later, and the regular bonus game may be automatically started such that when one regular bonus game is finished, the next regular bonus game is immediately started.

"Small wins (cherry, watermelon, bell) (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "cherry", "watermelon", and "bell") are winning wins in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbols The combination is "cherry pattern-ANY pattern-ANY pattern" for cherry, "watermelon pattern-watermelon pattern-watermelon pattern" for watermelon, and "bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern" for bell. Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in FIG. In the case of "cherry symbol-ANY symbol-ANY symbol", the symbol on the left reel 110 may be a "cherry" symbol, and the symbols on the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 may be any symbols.

"Replay" is a prize-winning combination (operating combination) that allows the next game to be played without inserting medals (game media) due to winning, and medals are not paid out. The corresponding symbol combination for the replay is "replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol".

Here, the internal winning probability of the winning combination will be outlined.

The internal winning probability of each role is obtained by combining numerical data corresponding to the range of lottery data associated with each role with numerical data within the range of random numbers acquired during internal lottery (65536 in this embodiment). It is obtained by the value divided by The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination and loss. In the winning combination internal lottery process to be described later, it is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery corresponds to the lottery data corresponding to any combination, and the internal winning combination is determined. In practice, this lottery data is prepared with settings 1 to 6 that differ in the winning probability of at least one combination, and the game parlor staff can arbitrarily select and set any of the set values. .

In the present embodiment, watermelon and cherry are respectively won when the winning combination is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process and when the operation timing of the stop operation is suitable. Hereinafter, watermelon and cherry are also referred to as chance roles. Further, Bell wins a prize when the winning combination is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process and the stop operation is performed in the correct stop operation order. Hereinafter, the bell is also referred to as a pushing role.

The AT state is a game state in which information (details of stop operation) that is advantageous to the player is notified when the player wins an internal win for a chance combination or a push-up combination. In the AT state, the effect image display device 157 and the payout number display 127 are used to execute the operation navigation for informing the content of the stop operation to help win a prize. Specifically, when the winning combination is internally won in the AT state, the stop operation order is announced, and when the chance combination is internally won in the AT state, the timing of the stop operation (suggestion of the internally won combination) is notified. Since the operation navigation is executed, the player can easily win a predetermined small winning combination by following the details of the stop operation of the operation navigation. That is, the AT state is a state in which a large profit is given to the player by operation navigation.

On the other hand, the normal state is a state in which operation navigation is not executed even if the player wins internally for a chance combination or a push-up combination.

In this embodiment, when the AT lottery is won in the normal state, the state is shifted to the AT state. In the AT lottery, for example, it may be possible to determine whether or not a winning combination is won based on the result of an internal winning combination lottery. Further, in this embodiment, when the number of games played in the normal state after the end of the AT state reaches a predetermined threshold value (hereinafter referred to as the ceiling number of games), the state is shifted to the AT state. That is, when the AT lottery is won in the normal state, or when the number of games played in the normal state reaches the ceiling number of games, the state is shifted to the AT state, and a predetermined number of AT games is awarded. In the AT state, an AT add-on lottery for adding the number of AT games is performed, and when winning the AT add-on lottery, a predetermined number of AT games is added. On the other hand, in the AT state, when all the given AT game numbers are consumed, the AT state ends and shifts to the normal state.

<Operation of the slot machine>
Next, the processing of the main control section 300, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500 will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

When the slot machine 100 is powered on, first, in step S101, various initial setting processes are performed. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt is disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables to be stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the WDT 314 is permitted to operate, and the initialization is performed. Set values, etc.

In step S102, medal insertion/start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, it is determined by detection by the sensor circuit 320 whether or not there is an electronic medal insertion operation by the bet buttons 130 to 132 or a direct medal insertion operation from the medal insertion slot 141, and if there is an insertion operation lights up the winning line display lamp 120 in accordance with the number of inserted medals. Also, preparations are made to transmit a medal insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-control section 400 . When the player wins the replay role in the previous game, the processing of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so the player does not need to insert medals.

In addition, it checks whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated based on the detection of the sensor circuit 320, and if it is determined that the start operation has been made, the number of inserted medals is determined, and the first sub-control section 400 In response, preparations are made to transmit a start lever acceptance command indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated.

In step S103, a valid pay line is determined.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is acquired.

In step S105, an internal lottery process for a winning combination is performed. In the internal lottery process for the winning combination, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state, and the internal lottery is performed using this table and the random number acquired in step S104. As a result of the internal lottery, when any winning combination (including an operating combination) is internally won, the condition device (flag) of the internally winning combination is operated (the flag of the winning combination is turned ON). Also, in this step S105, preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating the result of the internal winning combination lottery to the first sub-control section 400. FIG. For example, when the watermelon is internally won, preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating that the watermelon is internally won to the first sub-control unit 400, and the result of the internal winning combination lottery is lost (the winning combination is In the case of non-winning), preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating a loss to the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S106, reel stop data is selected based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery in step S105. Operation conditions are also set for the reel stop data of the winning combination for which the order of stop operation is required, and when the reel stop data corresponding to these are selected, the operation conditions are also set.

In step S107, reel rotation start processing for starting rotation of all the reels 110 to 112 is executed based on the start operation.

In step S108, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, it is possible to accept the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when one of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop data of the reel stop data is changed in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. One of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of frames to be drawn set in the stop data. If all the reels 110-112 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S109. In this step S108, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (more specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command, the second stop operation, and the for the stop button reception 2 command, and for the third stop operation, prepare to transmit the stop button reception 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel (Specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop command for the third stop operation 3 command) to the first sub-controller 400.

In step S109, a winning determination process is performed. In the winning determination process, the winning of the symbols stopped by pressing the stop buttons 137 to 139 is determined, and when a combination of symbols corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, the winning. judged to have won the role. For example, if "watermelon pattern - watermelon pattern - watermelon pattern" is aligned on the activated prize line, it is determined that the watermelon prize has been won. Also, in this step S109, preparations are made to transmit a display determination command indicating the result of winning determination to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S110, medal payout processing is performed. In the medal payout process, if the player wins some winning combination with payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out. In step S110, preparations are made to transmit a medal payout command indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S111, game state control processing is performed. In this game state control process, control for shifting the game state is performed. For example, in the case of BB winning, preparations are made so that the BB game can be started from the next time. In addition, for example, when a predetermined condition is established, control of the game state of the AT system such as from the normal state to the AT state or from the AT state to the normal state is also performed. Also, in this step S111, preparations are made to transmit a game state command indicating the game state to the first sub-control section 400. FIG.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. Various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206 in FIG. 5) of the main controller timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S203, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S205, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S<b>206 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S207, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S203, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S209, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S211, and if the low-voltage signal is off (power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes for ending the timer interrupt ending process are performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S211, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, it returns to the main control unit main processing shown in FIG.

<Processing of the first sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 6(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, the main processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 6(a).

When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state.

In step S302, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S303.

In step S303, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S304, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S305, effect control processing (details will be described later) is performed. Here, production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408 . This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing updating processing of the effect data when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S307, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for various lamps 420 in the performance data read out in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 422. FIG.

In step S308, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. FIG.

In step S309, information output processing is performed to set the command to be transmitted to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-controller 500 in the effect data read out in step S305, the setting for outputting this control command is made, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 6(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S401 of command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 6(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S501, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 6A and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S502, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S309, the random number value for effect is updated, and the like.

<Processing of the second sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 7A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 7(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 7(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S3001 of FIG. 7A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S601. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, initialization processing of storage areas in the VRAM 518, and the like are performed.

In step S602, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S603.

In step S603, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S604, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines each command received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S605, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S604, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S606, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the effect data read in step S605, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S602.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 7(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 7(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S801, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 7A and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S802, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing in step S4006 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 7(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S901, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S902, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S903; otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S903, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S901, the CPU 504 obtains image data information (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, etc.) forming the display image. , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516 . The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S905, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. wait for is entered.

In step S906, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Playability of Example A1>
Next, the playability of Example A1 will be described. In Example A1, the two-coin bet game is disadvantageous to the player compared to the three-coin bet game. Here, the term "disadvantageous" specifically means that in a two-coin bet game, a process for giving a privilege advantageous to the player is not executed. For example, in a double bet game, an AT lottery for giving the number of AT games executed in the normal state, an AT extra lottery for giving an additional number of AT games in the AT state, a lottery for shifting to a specialized zone, etc. It may not be executed, or in a two-coin bet game, the number of games in the normal state after the end of the AT state may not be updated (added). For this reason, in the double-bet game, a "two-bet notification", which is an effect for notifying that the game is a two-bet game, is executed to alert the player that a game with a disadvantage is being executed. ing. Thus, in Example A1, a 3-coin bet game is recommended.
<Production of Example A1>

In Example A1, there is a case where the announcement effect is executed in the normal state. The advance notice effect is a effect including image display using the effect image display device 157 . The image display of the notice effect (hereinafter referred to as the notice display) d1 is, for example, a display suggesting an internal winning combination that is the result of the internal winning combination processing. This is a display for notifying the advance notice of In the game in which the notice effect is executed in the normal state, the notice display d1 is started to be displayed based on the operation of the start lever, and is finished to be displayed when all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped after the third stop operation. It is

Further, in the normal state of the embodiment A1, it is recommended that the stop buttons 137 to 139 be pressed forward (the first stop operation is the left), and an operation different from the recommended operation (an operation that is not forward pressed) is recommended. If done, a warning is issued. The warning notification of this embodiment is composed only of image display using the effect image display device 157, and is not notified by voice or lamp. An image display (hereinafter referred to as a warning display) d2 of warning notification is, for example, a display suggesting a recommended stop operation (for example, a word display such as "Left push is recommended"). Note that the warning display d1 is displayed when an operation different from the recommended operation is performed, so it can be said that it is a display that calls attention to the player. The warning display d1 is configured to start displaying on the basis of the first stop operation, and end on the basis that all the reels 110 to 112 stop after the third stopping operation.

In addition, in a game in which an operation different from the operation recommended in the normal state is performed, a penalty is incurred in the game. This penalty is, for example, a penalty in which the number of games in the normal state after the end of the AT state is not updated (added). Note that even in a game in which a penalty has occurred, the internal winning combination lottery process and the AT lottery process (for example, the AT lottery process based on the internal winning combination) are executed. Further, even when this penalty occurs in a game in which the above-described advance notice effect is executed, the notice effect is continuously executed, so that the player can be prevented from feeling that a disadvantage has occurred.

Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to specific examples of effects. In the following, if there is no commentary, it shows the effect of the 3-coin bet game.

FIG. 8(A) shows an example of an effect displayed on the effect image display device 157 when a recommended stop operation is performed in a game in which the normal notice effect is not executed.

In the game shown in FIG. 8(A), since the stop operation of forward pressing is performed, no warning display is performed. That is, the effect image display device 157 only displays the normal background image d0 from the start lever operation to the third stop operation.

FIG. 8B shows an example of an effect displayed on the effect image display device 157 when a recommended stop operation is performed in a game in which a normal state notice effect is executed.

In the game shown in FIG. 8(B), an advance notice display d1A (for example, the display of the expression change of the torso shown in FIG. 8(B-1)) is started based on the start lever operation, and the advance notice is started based on the first stop operation. Display d1B (for example, a display of a princess wearing a pink kimono, in this example, an advance notice display announcing Cherry as an internal winning combination) is started, and after the third stop operation, the advance notice is continued for a predetermined period of time. The display d1B is displayed on the screen (the advance notice display d1B is displayed on the screen until the next game betting operation is performed). In the advance notice display d1B, for example, an image in which a princess appears from the left side of the screen, moves to the right side of the screen, and then stops may be displayed. Thus, in this example of effect, the preview display d1 is composed of two effect images of the preview display d1A and the preview display d1B. In addition, in the game shown in FIG. 8B, since the stop operation of forward pressing is performed, no warning display is performed.

FIG. 9 shows an example of an effect displayed on the effect image display device 157 when an unrecommended stop operation is performed in a game in which the normal state notice effect is not executed.

In the game shown in FIG. 9, the stop operation (for example, the first stop operation is in the middle) is not a forward push, so as shown in FIG. 9B, a warning display (for example, "left Display of text such as "It is recommended to play") d2 is started. Also, as shown in FIGS. 9(c) to 9(f), the warning display d2 started to be displayed based on the first stop operation starts an erasing animation based on the third stop operation, and after a predetermined time elapses. , the warning display d2 is configured to end the display. Specifically, the warning display d2 is composed of an animation in which the image area is gradually reduced based on the third stop operation and finally disappears.

FIG. 10 shows an example of an effect displayed on the effect image display device 157 when an unrecommended stop operation is performed in a game in which a normal state notice effect is executed.

In the game shown in FIG. 10, as shown in FIG. 10(a), an advance notice display d1A (for example, the expression change of the torso shown in FIG. 10(a)) is started based on the operation of the start lever. After that, as shown in FIG. 10(b), a non-forward-pressing stop operation (for example, the first stop operation is in the middle) was performed, so a warning display (for example, "left-handed is recommended") is displayed based on the first stop operation. wording display such as) d2 is started. Further, as shown in FIG. 10(b), an advance notice display d1B (for example, display of a princess wearing a pink kimono in FIG. 10(b)) is also started based on the first stop operation. Thus, in this example of effect, the warning display is displayed based on the first stop operation, and the warning display d1B is also displayed behind the warning display d2.

That is, in the embodiment A1, the warning display d1 (the warning display d1A) is first started, and then the warning display d2 may be started. In this case, the warning display d1 (preview display d1B) is configured to continue to be displayed even after the warning display d2 is started. As a result, according to the embodiment A1, the advance notice display d1 is continuously displayed even after the warning display d2 is performed, so that the player can see the advance notice display d1 for a long period of time, and the interest in the game is improved. be able to. In addition, although the game is operated in an unrecommended pressing order, the AT lottery and the like based on the internally won cherries are executed as usual.

The warning display d2 started based on the first stop operation continues to be displayed thereafter, and as shown in FIGS. disappears. The disappearance of the warning display d2 is the same as the phenomenon described with reference to FIGS. 9(c)-(f). On the other hand, the notice display d1B started based on the first stop operation continues to be displayed on the screen for a predetermined time even after the third stop operation, as shown in FIGS. Thus, the warning display d1B is displayed even after the warning display d2 disappears.

As described above, in the embodiment A1, the warning display d1 (previous display d1A, the warning display d1B) started before the warning display d2 ends after the warning display d2 ends. As a result, according to the embodiment A1, when the warning display d1 and the warning display d2 are displayed at the same time, the warning display d2 is ended first. It can be shown for a long period until the end of

In the case of the present embodiment, since the recommended operation is forward pressing, the warning display d2 is started based on the first stop operation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the recommended stopping operation is the operation sequence of a combination of the first stopping operation, the second stopping operation, and the third stopping operation, the timing at which the not recommended stopping operation is performed, that is, the first stopping operation or the third stopping operation You may make it start the warning display d2 based on 2 stop operation. That is, the warning display d2 may be started while at least one reel is rotating.

11 and 12 show the effect image display device 157 when a stop operation not recommended is performed in a game in which a normal state notice effect is executed, and power failure/recovery occurs after the first stop operation. shows an example of the effect displayed in . Note that the operations from the start lever operation to the first stop operation (FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b)) are the same as the production example shown in FIG. 10, so the explanation is omitted.

In the game shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, after the first stop operation, specifically, when power failure occurs while the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 are rotating, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the effect image display device 157 displays a blackout screen d3. After that, when the power is restored, first, as shown in FIG. When the reel 110 and the right reel 112 start rotating, as shown in FIG. display) is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 11(f) and 12(a), when the right reel 112 is stopped by the second stop operation and the left reel 110 is stopped by the third stop operation, the restoration display d4B is displayed. In this state, the warning display d2 starts to be displayed based on the third stop operation. The warning display d2 started based on this third stop operation continues to be displayed thereafter, and as shown in FIGS. Disappear. The disappearance of the warning display d2 is the same as the phenomenon described with reference to FIGS. 9(c)-(f). On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11(d) to (f) and FIGS. 12(a) to (d), the advance notice display d1 is not displayed after power is restored.

In the game in which the notice effect in the normal state is executed in this way, if a stop operation that is not recommended is performed while at least one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating, and then the power is cut off/restored, , after the power is restored, the warning display d2 is resumed based on the stoppage of all the reels 110 to 112, but the advance notice display d1 is not resumed. This is because the priority of the advance notice display d1 is lower than that of the warning display d2.

According to the embodiment A1, when the power is cut off/restored, the advance notice display d1 (the notice display d1A) is not restarted, so that the player can be notified that some kind of trouble has occurred. On the other hand, according to the embodiment A1, when the power is cut off/restored, the warning display d2 is resumed after the power is restored. It is possible to draw the player's attention by making the player re-recognize that it has been done.

The restoration display d4B started to be displayed after the power is restored is, as shown in FIGS. 11(e) to (f) and FIGS. displayed continuously. That is, the restoration display d4B is continuously displayed until the betting operation for the next game is performed and the normal background image d0 is displayed.

FIG. 13A shows an effect image display when a stop operation is performed that does not follow the reported operation details in a game in which the bell (push order role) is internally won in the AT state and the operation navigation is executed. An example of the effect displayed on the device 157 is shown. The effect image display device 157 displays an operation navigation image d11 (for example, an image of 213 numbers from the left with 1 being the largest), suggesting that the recommended operation is middle left and right.

In the game shown in FIG. 13A, the player performs a stop operation with the first stop operation to the left without following the contents of the operation navigation image d11, that is, the player performs a stop operation different from the recommended operation. However, in this case, the warning display d2 is not displayed. Thus, in the AT state, even if a stop operation is performed that does not follow the contents of the operation navigation, the warning display d2 is not displayed. Although the warning display d2 is not performed, a notification different from the warning display d2, for example, a notification to comply with the operation navigation (for example, a word display or voice notification such as "Please protect the navigation") may be performed. .

In the embodiment A1, the warning display d2 is not executed when an operation different from the recommended operation is performed in the AT state, but the state in which the warning display d2 is not executed is not limited to the AT state. For example, the warning display d2 may not be executed in a bonus state, pseudo-bonus, or the like. That is, in a broad sense, if an operation different from the recommended operation is performed in the first state (for example, normal state), the warning display d2 is executed, but the second state different from the first state If an operation different from the recommended operation is performed (for example, in a state different from the normal state such as the AT state), the warning display d2 may not be executed.

FIG. 13B shows an example of an effect displayed on the effect image display device 157 when a two-coin bet game is executed in the normal state and a two-coin bet notification d5 is executed.

In the two-coin bet game, as shown in FIG. 13B-2, a two-coin bet notification d5 starts to be displayed based on the operation of the start lever. The 2-coin bet notification d5 is an attention calling effect for informing that the game is a 2-coin bet game. The double bet notification d2 is, for example, an image effect displayed on the entire surface of the effect image display device 157, and is displayed from after the start lever operation to the third stop operation. That is, while the 2-coin bet notification d2 is being displayed, other effect images are not displayed in order to focus on calling attention. Therefore, the notice display d1 is not displayed in the two-coin bet game. Note that, as shown in FIG. 13(B-3), the double bet notification d2 ends based on the next game bet operation after the third stop operation, and returns to the original effect image (normal background image d0).

As described above, in the two-coin bet game, the number of games in the normal state is not updated (added). It may be displayed (for example, the number of games is displayed at the upper right corner of the normal background image d0 in FIGS. 13B-1 and 13B-3).

<Summary of Example A1>
(1) As described above, according to the gaming machine (eg, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (eg, Example A1),
Operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided at a position operable by the player;
Notification means (eg, effect image display device 157, first sub-controller 400, second sub-controller 500, etc.) capable of executing first notification (eg, warning notification);
A game machine equipped with a notice means (for example, the effect image display device 157, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, etc.) capable of executing the notice (for example, the notice effect),
The first notification is a notification suggesting an operation (for example, forward pressing) recommended for operation of the operation means,
The notification means is means for executing the first notification in a game in which an operation different from the recommended operation is performed (for example, FIG. 9, etc.),
There is a case where the first notice is executed in the game in which the notice is executed (hereinafter referred to as "first case") (for example, FIG. 10),
The notice means is a means for continuously executing the notice that has been executed in the first case even after the first notice is executed (for example, FIG. 10 (a) to (f) )Such),
This is the first basic configuration.

According to this first basic configuration, since the notice is continuously executed even after the first notice is executed, the notice is given to the player for a long time even in the game in which the first notice is executed. I can show you.

In the above first basic configuration,
Equipped with a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of patterns are applied and driven to rotate,
The operation means is a plurality of stop operation reception means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) that receive a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels,
with
The notification means is means for starting execution of the first notification in connection with the first stop operation (for example, first stop operation) of the plurality of reels,
The notice means is means for starting execution of the notice before starting execution of the first notice in the first case (for example, FIG. 10 (a), etc.),
The notice means is means for executing the notice even after the end of execution of the first notice in the first case (for example, FIG. 10 (f), etc.),
This is referred to as a preferred configuration 11.

According to the preferred configuration 11, since the first notification is ended first, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the notice.

In preferred configuration 11,
The notification means is a means for terminating the execution of the first notification in relation to the fact that all of the plurality of reels have been stopped (for example, the first to third stop operations) (for example, , FIGS. 10(e) to (f), etc.),
This is referred to as preferred configuration 12 .

According to the preferred configuration 12, the player can be made to pay attention to the advance notice after all of the plurality of reels have been stopped.

In preferred configurations 11-12,
In the first case, after the first notification is started, the notification means has a state in which at least one of the plurality of reels is rotating (for example, as shown in FIG. 11(b) , the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 are rotating), and then the power is restored (hereinafter referred to as "second case"), the execution of the notice is resumed after the power is restored. (e.g., FIGS. 11 and 12),
In the second case, the notifying means is means for resuming execution of the first notifying during at least a part of the period of the game in which power has been cut off (for example, FIG. 12(a)),
This is referred to as a preferred configuration 13.

According to the preferred configuration 13, since the notice is not resumed after the power is cut off/restored, it is possible to notify the player that trouble has occurred. In addition, since the first notification is resumed after the power is cut off/restored, the player can be reminded again that an operation different from the recommended operation has been performed.

In preferred configuration 13,
The notification means is means for executing the first notification for a predetermined period of time in relation to the fact that all of the plurality of reels have stopped in the second case.
This is referred to as preferred configuration 14 .

According to the preferred configuration 14, even in the second case, it is possible to give the player time to confirm the first notification.

In preferred configurations 11-14,
When the notification means executes a second notification (for example, operation navigation) for notifying the operation content for the plurality of stop operation receiving means in a certain game state (for example, AT state) (hereinafter referred to as "third ) is a means of
The notification means is means for not executing the first notification when an operation different from the operation content of the second notification is performed in the third case (for example, FIG. 13 (A)),
This is referred to as a preferred configuration 15.

According to the preferred configuration 15, since the first notification is not executed in certain game states, it is possible to provide game variety.

(2) As described above, according to the gaming machine (eg, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (eg, Example A1),
Operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.) provided at positions operable by the player;
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a start lever (for example, a start lever 135) for starting rotation of the plurality of reels;
Notification means (eg, effect image display device 157, first sub-controller 400, second sub-controller 500, etc.) capable of executing first notification (eg, warning notification);
A game machine equipped with a notice means (for example, the effect image display device 157, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, etc.) capable of executing the notice (for example, the notice effect),
The first notification is a notification suggesting an operation (for example, forward pressing) recommended for operation of the operation means,
The notification means is means for executing the first notification in a game in which an operation different from the recommended operation is performed (for example, FIG. 9),
There is a case where the first notice is executed in the game in which the notice is executed (hereinafter referred to as "first case") (for example, FIG. 10),
In the first case, the notice means is means for starting the execution of the notice in relation to the operation of the start lever (for example, FIG. 10(a), etc.),
In the first case, the notification means is means for starting execution of the first notification in relation to the first stop operation of the plurality of reels (for example, FIG. 10B )Such),
The notice means is a means for continuously executing the notice that has been executed in the first case even after the first notice is executed (for example, FIG. 10 (a) to (f) )Such),,
This is the second basic configuration.

According to the second basic configuration, since the notice is continuously executed even after the first notice is executed, the notice is shown to the player for a long time even in the game in which the first notice is executed. be able to.

In a second basic configuration,
The notification means is means for executing the notification even after the execution of the first notification is completed in the first case,
This is referred to as preferred configuration 21 .
According to the preferred configuration 21, since the notice is continuously executed even after the end of the first notice, the notice can be shown to the player for a long time even in the game in which the first notice is executed, The player can be made to pay attention to the notice.

In a second basic or preferred configuration 21,
The notification means is a means for terminating the execution of the first notification in relation to the fact that all of the plurality of reels have been stopped (for example, the first to third stop operations) (for example, , FIGS. 10(e) to (f), etc.),
This is the preferred configuration 22.

The preferred configuration 22 allows the player to pay attention to the advance notice after all of the plurality of reels have been stopped.

In a second basic or preferred configuration 21-22,
In the first case, after the first notification is started, the notification means has a state in which at least one of the plurality of reels is rotating (for example, as shown in FIG. 11(b) , the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 are rotating), and then the power is restored (hereinafter referred to as "second case"), the execution of the notice is resumed after the power is restored. (e.g., FIGS. 11 and 12),
In the second case, the notifying means is means for resuming execution of the first notifying during at least a part of the period of the game in which power has been cut off (for example, FIG. 12(a)),
This is referred to as a preferred configuration 23.

According to the preferred configuration 23, since the notice is not resumed after the power is cut off/restored, it is possible to notify the player that trouble has occurred. In addition, since the first notification is resumed after the power is cut off/restored, the player can be reminded again that an operation different from the recommended operation has been performed.

In a preferred arrangement 23,
The notification means is means for executing the first notification for a predetermined period of time in relation to the fact that all of the plurality of reels have stopped in the second case.
is preferred configuration 24 .

According to the preferred configuration 24, it is possible to give the player time to confirm the first notification even in the second case.

In a second basic configuration, preferred configurations 21-24,
The operation means is a plurality of stop operation reception means for receiving a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels,
When the notification means executes a second notification (for example, operation navigation) for notifying the operation content regarding the plurality of stop operation receiving means in a certain game state (for example, AT state) (hereinafter referred to as "third ) is a means of
The notification means is means for not executing the first notification when an operation different from the operation content of the second notification is performed in the third case (for example, FIG. 13(A)). ,
is a preferred configuration 25.

According to the preferred configuration 25, since the first notification is not executed in certain game states, it is possible to provide game variety.

(3) As described above, according to the gaming machine (eg, slot machine 100) of the above-described embodiment (eg, Example A1),
Operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided at a position operable by the player;
Notification means (eg, effect image display device 157, first sub-controller 400, second sub-controller 500, etc.) capable of executing first notification (eg, warning notification);
A game machine equipped with a notice means (for example, the effect image display device 157, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, etc.) capable of executing the notice (for example, the notice effect),
The first notification is a notification suggesting an operation (for example, forward pressing) recommended for operation of the operation means,
The notification means is means for executing the first notification in a game in which an operation different from the recommended operation is performed (for example, FIG. 9),
There is a case where the first notice is executed in the game in which the notice is executed (hereinafter referred to as "first case") (for example, FIG. 10),
The notice means is a means for continuously executing the notice that has been executed in the first case even after the first notice is executed (for example, FIG. 10 (a) to (f) )Such),
The notification means is a means for executing the first notification only as a display effect (for example, FIG. 9 etc.),
This is the third basic configuration.

According to the third basic configuration, since the notice is continuously executed even after the first notice is executed, the notice is shown to the player for a long time even in the game in which the first notice is executed. be able to.

In the third basic configuration,
Equipped with a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of patterns are applied and driven to rotate,
The operation means is a plurality of stop operation reception means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) for receiving a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels,
with
The notification means is means for starting execution of the first notification in connection with the first stop operation (for example, first stop operation) of the plurality of reels,
The notice means is means for starting execution of the notice before starting execution of the first notice in the first case (for example, FIG. 10 (a), etc.),
The notice means is means for executing the notice even after the end of execution of the first notice in the first case (for example, FIG. 10 (f), etc.),
This is referred to as preferred configuration 31 .

According to the preferred configuration 31, since the first notification is terminated first, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the notice.

In a preferred arrangement 31,
The notification means is a means for terminating the execution of the first notification in relation to the fact that all of the plurality of reels have been stopped (for example, the first to third stop operations) (for example, , FIGS. 10(e) to (f), etc.),
This is the preferred configuration 32.

The preferred configuration 32 allows the player's attention to be drawn to the advance notice after all of the plurality of reels have been stopped.

In preferred configurations 31-32,
In the first case, after the first notification is started, the notification means has a state in which at least one of the plurality of reels is rotating (for example, as shown in FIG. 11(b) , the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 are rotating), and then the power is restored (hereinafter referred to as "second case"), the execution of the notice is resumed after the power is restored. (e.g., FIGS. 11 and 12),
In the second case, the notifying means is means for resuming execution of the first notifying during at least a part of the period of the game in which power has been cut off (for example, FIG. 12(a)),
This is referred to as preferred configuration 33.

According to the preferred configuration 33, since the notice is not resumed after the power is cut off/restored, the player can be notified of the occurrence of the trouble. In addition, since the first notification is resumed after the power is cut off/restored, the player can be reminded again that an operation different from the recommended operation has been performed.

In preferred arrangement 33,
The notification means is means for executing the first notification for a predetermined period of time in relation to the fact that all of the plurality of reels have stopped in the second case.
This is the preferred configuration 34.

According to the preferred configuration 34, the player can be given time to confirm the first notification even in the second case.

In preferred configurations 31-34,
When the notification means executes a second notification (for example, operation navigation) for notifying the operation content for the plurality of stop operation receiving means in a certain game state (for example, AT state) (hereinafter referred to as "third ) is a means of
The notification means is means for not executing the first notification when an operation different from the operation content of the second notification is performed in the third case (for example, FIG. 13 (A)),
This is the preferred configuration 35.

According to the preferred configuration 35, since the first notification is not executed in certain game states, game variety can be provided.

(4) As described above, according to the gaming machine (eg, slot machine 100) of the above-described embodiment (eg, Example A1),
A gaming machine equipped with display means (e.g., effect image display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, etc.) capable of displaying a first display (e.g., warning display d2),
The first display is a display related to alerting the player,
The display means is means for displaying the first display when a first condition is satisfied (for example, an unrecommended stop operation, etc.),
When the power is turned off while the first display is being displayed and then the power is restored, the display means displays a display (hereinafter referred to as "recovery display") related to restoration from the power interruption (for example, display d4A, d4B, etc.) (e.g., FIGS. 11(c)-(f), FIGS. 12(a)-(d)),
The display means displays the recovery display when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied while the recovery display is being displayed (for example, a third stop operation, a winning determination, etc.). Means for starting the first display in a state where the
This is the fourth basic configuration.

According to the fourth basic configuration, the first display is performed even during the restoration display after power failure/restoration, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the attention.

In the fourth basic configuration,
Equipped with a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of patterns are applied and driven to rotate,
The first condition is a condition that is satisfied in a state in which at least one of the plurality of reels is rotating (hereinafter referred to as "first state") (for example, as shown in FIG. 11(b) such as a state in which the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 are rotating),
When the display means is powered off in the first state and the first display is displayed, and then the power is restored, and the second condition is satisfied, the power failure occurs. Means for starting the recovery display and the first display during execution of the game played (FIGS. 11(d) to (e), FIGS. 12(a) to (d)),
This is referred to as preferred configuration 41 .

According to the preferred configuration 41, it is possible to alert the player in the game in which the power failure occurred.

In a fourth basic or preferred configuration 41,
The display means is a means for erasing the first display started when the second condition is satisfied in a game in which power failure occurs (for example, FIGS. 12(a) to 12(d)),
The display means is a means for erasing the recovery display after erasing the first display in a game in which power failure has occurred (for example, FIGS. 12(a) to (e)),
This is the preferred configuration 42.

According to the preferred configuration 42, by continuing to display the recovery display in the game in which the power failure occurred, it is possible to emphasize that the next game is a normal game.

In a preferred arrangement 42,
The first display started when the second condition is satisfied is configured as a moving image that disappears over time (FIGS. 12(a) to (d)),
This is a preferred configuration 43.

According to the preferred configuration 43, even if power is cut off, the first display can be reliably shown to the player after the power is restored.

In a fourth basic configuration, preferred configurations 41-43,
Equipped with operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided at a position where the player can operate,
The first display is a display suggesting a recommended operation (for example, forward pressing, etc.) regarding the operation of the operation means.
This is the preferred configuration 44.

According to the preferred configuration 44, when an unrecommended operation is performed, the recommended operation is notified, so it is possible to call attention to the unrecommended operation.

In a fourth basic configuration, preferred configurations 41-44,
A notice display means (for example, effect image display device 157, first sub-controller 400, second sub-controller 500, etc.) capable of displaying notice display (for example, notice display d1) is provided,
The advance notice display means may display the advance notice display in a game in which the first condition is established and the first display is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "first case"). (for example, FIGS. 11(a)-(b)),
In the first case, if the power is cut off while the previous notice display and the first display are being displayed and then the power is restored, the previous notice display is not restarted after the power is restored. (For example, FIGS. 11(d) to (f), FIGS. 12(a) to (d)),
This is the preferred configuration 45.

According to the preferred configuration 45, since the recovery display and the first display are more important in a game in which power failure occurs, the player is more likely to pay attention to the recovery display and the first display by not displaying the advance notice display. can be made

[Example A2]
<Playability of Example A2>
Next, the playability of Example A2 will be described. The embodiment A2 differs from the embodiment A1 in the setting of the winning combination (type of winning combination, symbol combination (not shown), etc.) and the setting of the game state (type of game state, transition condition, etc.). 14 and 15, the winning combination and the game state will be described from the viewpoint of shifting to the AT state.

The small wins of Example A2 include "Cherry", "Bell", and "Watermelon". Cherry, Bell and Watermelon are all winning hands associated with the AT lottery. In addition, among the replaying roles of Example A2, "7 RIP" is also a prize winning role related to the AT lottery.

The cherries of Example A2 include weak cherries, strong cherries, and strongest cherries (middle cherries). Bells include common bells and push order bells. The common bell is a bell that will be won regardless of the order of stop operations when the relevant role is internally won. It is a bell that won't win if it doesn't match. Push order bells are further subdivided into six bells: (1) LCR bell, (2) LRC bell, (3) CLR bell, (4) CRL bell, (5) RLC bell, and (5) RCL bell. A different correct operation order is assigned to each subdivided pushing order bell. The range of the lottery data associated with each of the six subdivided push-order bells is the same. For example, when the LCR bell is internally won, the left, middle, right stop operation is the correct operation, and the other stop operations are the incorrect operation. In addition, when the CRL Bell is internally won, the correct operation is the stop operation of the center, right, left, and right. Incidentally, in Example A2, the watermelon and cherry are called the chance role, and the push order bell is called the push order role. In addition, the small winning combination and the replaying combination related to these AT lotteries may be set as a single winning combination in the winning combination internal lottery process, or may be set as a duplicate combination winning multiple winning combinations at the same time. May be set.

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the transition of the game state (AT system game state) of the embodiment A2. The gaming state of the embodiment A2 is roughly classified into a normal state, an AT state, and a chance zone. The normal state includes a high-probability mode in which the probability of transition to the AT state is high and a low-probability mode in which the probability of transition to the AT state is low. The transition between the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode is executed when a predetermined condition is established (for example, a winning combination in the winning combination internal lottery process, the number of games completed, etc.). In addition, in FIG. 15, the state including the specialized zone is indicated as the AT state, but the state is not limited to this. The AT state may not include specialized zones. In this case, the gaming state of embodiment A2 is roughly divided into a normal state, an AT state, a chance zone, and a specialized zone. In Example A2, operation navigation may be performed in the AT state, the chance zone, and the special zone.

If the AT lottery is won in the normal state, the AT state (hereinafter, the AT state transitioned from the normal state is referred to as the "initial AT state"). FIG. 14(a) is a table schematically showing the contents of the AT lottery in the normal state. The AT lottery in the normal state is executed based on the internal winning combination of the internal winning combination lottery process. For example, according to FIG. 14(a), in a normal state, an AT lottery is executed in a game in which any of Common Bell, Watermelon, Weak Cherry, Strong Cherry, or Strongest Cherry is internally won. Further, for example, when the common bell is internally won in the low probability mode of the normal state (the probability of internally winning the common bell in the winning combination internal lottery process is 1/40), the AT lottery is won with a probability of 1/65536. On the other hand, when the common bell is internally won in the normal state high probability mode (the probability of internally winning the common bell in the internal winning combination lottery process is 1/40), the AT lottery is won with a probability of 100/65536. Then, when the common bell is internally won in the normal state and the initial AT state is entered, the initial AT state ends when the difference number reaches 200 in the initial AT state. Here, the number difference means the difference between the number of game media (for example, medals) paid out and the number of game media inserted. In the embodiment A2, when the AT state is shifted to for the first time based on the common bell winning, the AT state ending condition is that the number of difference is 200, and the initial AT state is shifted to based on the watermelon, weak cherry, or strong cherry winning. In this case, 300 sheets is set as the difference number as a condition for ending the AT state. It should be noted that, when the state is shifted to the first AT state based on the winning of the strongest cherry, a special zone is set, and the number of cards to be added to the end condition of the first AT state is determined in the special zone. The condition for ending the AT state for the first time is the difference number obtained by adding the extra number given in the specialized zone to the difference number 300. In this way, the initial AT state is the common bell, watermelon, weak cherry, or when the initial AT state is shifted based on the strong cherry winning, no specialized zone is provided, and the first time based on the strongest cherry winning A specialized zone is provided only when the AT state is changed.

The playing period of the specialized zone in Example A2 is 5 games. When shifting to the AT state for the first time based on winning the strongest cherry, five games in the specialized zone are executed first. Also, when shifting to the AT state after the second time, which will be described later, five games in the specialized zone are first executed. Then, when winning the extra number lottery in the five games of this specialized zone, the total value of the winning extra number is added to the initial differential number (specifically, 300). FIG. 14(c) is a table schematically showing the content of the number-of-addition lottery for the specialized zone. The number-of-addition lottery in the specialized zone is linked to the internal winning combination of the internal winning combination lottery process, and the internal winning combination is the winning combination (specifically, LCR bell, LRC bell, CLR bell, CRL bell, RLC Bell, RCL Bell) or a chance combination (specifically, Watermelon, Weak Cherry, Strong Cherry, and Strongest Cherry), a predetermined number of additional numbers are provided. For example, if the LCR Bell is internally won in the special zone, the additional number is set to 123, and for example, if the watermelon is internally won, the additional number is set to 200. In addition, in the case of an internal lottery at the push order bell, the number notified by the operation navigation system (the number indicating the content of the stop operation of the correct answer, for example, 123 in the case of left, middle, right, etc.) is added as it is. Therefore, the player can immediately grasp the number of extra coins by looking at the numbers on the operation navigation display d11.

The first AT state ends when the difference number of sheets in the first AT state reaches the difference number set as the end condition of the AT state (for example, 200 sheets, 300 sheets, 300 sheets + α), and shifts to the chance zone. do. The game period of the chance zone is 30 games. The chance zone is a state in which the AT state (AT1 set) may be granted again, so it may be described as a set stock challenge on the drawing. That is, the chance zone is also a pullback zone for shifting to the AT state after the second time. When the AT pullback lottery is won in the chance zone between 30 games, the state shifts to the second and subsequent AT state, while when the AT pullback lottery is not won in the chance zone between 30 games, the state shifts to the normal state. . In the chance zone, the increase base of game media (medals) is set higher than in the normal state, but the increase base of game media (medals) is set lower than in the AT state. This is because, in the chance zone, the execution frequency of operation navigation is set lower than that in the AT state in the event of an internal winning of the order bell.

FIG. 14(b) is a table schematically showing the contents of the AT withdrawal lottery for the chance zone. The AT withdrawal lottery is executed based on the internal winning combination of the internal winning combination lottery process. Specifically, when the internal winning combination is watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, strongest cherry (middle stage cherry), or 7 lips, an AT withdrawal lottery is executed. For example, when the watermelon is internally won, the AT withdrawal lottery is won with a probability of 1000/65536. In addition, when the 7th reply is internally elected, the AT withdrawal lottery is won with a probability of 1/200 (if the 7th reply is internally elected, the prize is surely won). In addition, when the strongest cherry is internally won and the AT withdrawal lottery is won, two specialized zones, that is, 10 games of the specialized zone are provided in the AT state after the second time. In other words, when the strongest cherry moves to the AT state based on the internal winning, there is a tendency for the number of additional cards to increase further.

As a result of winning the AT pullback lottery in the chance zone, when shifting to the AT state after the second time, the special zone is always set in the AT state after the second time. For this reason, the second and subsequent AT states are set so that the probability of adding the difference number of sheets to the initial value of 300 difference sheets is higher than that of the first AT state. Thus, in Example A2, the value given in the second and subsequent AT states (for example, the difference in the number of sheets as the condition for ending the AT state) is the value given in the first AT state (for example, the end of the AT state The value is greater than the difference in the number of sheets as a condition). In other words, the specialized zone can be said to be a state in which the value of the AT state, which is an advantageous gaming state (for example, the difference number of coins as a condition for ending the AT state) is increased.

As described above, in Example A2, since the special zone is more likely to be given when the AT state continues, more value is given when the AT state continues. In the embodiment A2, as shown in FIG. 14(c), the same numerical value is used for the AT withdrawal lottery value in the chance zone regardless of the number of stays in the chance zone. , the second AT state, the third AT state, . . . ) are all the same.

In the embodiment A2, the difference number (acquired number) is set as the condition for ending the AT state, but unlike this, the number of games may be set. Also, the difference number (acquired number) and the number of games may be combined as the condition for ending the AT state. For example, the difference number (acquired number) may be set as the initial value and the additional amount may be the number of games, or the initial value may be set as the number of games and the additional amount may be the difference number (acquired number).

In addition, in the embodiment A2, only the route via the chance zone is provided as the route for transitioning from the first AT state to the second AT state. A route may be provided to directly transition to the AT state. In addition, in the embodiment A2, the configuration in which one set of AT status is provided in the chance zone is adopted, but a configuration in which a plurality of sets of AT status are provided may be adopted.
<Production of Example A2>

FIG. 16 shows an example of an effect displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the case of shifting to the normal state because the AT pulling-back lottery was not won in the chance zone after the first AT state ended. The effect image shown in FIG. 16 is an example of the effect image in the case of the state transition of normal state→first AT state→chance zone→normal state.

FIG. 16(a) shows an effect image (normal background image d0) in the normal state before shifting to the AT state. If the AT lottery is won in the normal state (see FIG. 14(a)), the state shifts to the first AT state.

FIG. 16(b) is an effect image when starting the AT state for the first time, and FIG. 16(c) is an effect image when ending the AT state for the first time. More specifically, when watermelon, weak cherry, or strong cherry is won internally in the normal state, and the initial AT state is shifted based on the internal winning combination (when the condition for ending the initial AT state reaches 300 sheets difference). is shown. In the AT state, as shown in FIGS. 16B and 16C, an AT background image d10 is displayed, and a difference number display indicating the number of sheets acquired in the AT state at the present time (for example, "0000get", "0300get", etc.) Word display) d12 is displayed. Further, when starting the AT state for the first time, as shown in FIG. 16B, a termination condition display (for example, a word display such as "300 remaining sheets") d13 indicating the termination condition of the AT state for the first time is displayed. When ending the AT state for the first time, a display (for example, display of words such as "next set stock challenge") d14 indicating that the state will shift to the chance state is displayed. In the game in which the AT state is started for the first time, the operation navigation image d11 is displayed as shown in FIG. .

FIG. 16(d) is an effect image when starting the chance zone after the first AT state is finished, and FIG. 16(e) is an effect image when ending the chance zone. In the chance zone, as shown in FIGS. 16(d) and (e), a chance zone background image d20 is displayed, and the number of remaining games in the chance zone (for example, "30 games remaining", "0 games remaining", etc.) is displayed. Word display) d21 is displayed. In the chance zone, as shown in FIG. 16(d), a conditional display (for example, a wording display such as "AT consecutive chan with 7 matches") d22 for shifting to the AT state is displayed, and the chance zone ends. Sometimes, as shown in FIG. 16(e), an end display 1 (for example, word display such as "See you later") d23 indicating that the AT state is not given is displayed. In this example of effect, since the AT pulling-back lottery was not won in the chance zone, the state shifts to the normal state after the end of the chance zone.

FIG. 16(f) shows the effect image (normal background image d0) in the normal state after finishing the chance zone.

17 to 19 show an example of the effect displayed on the effect image display device 157 when the AT pull-back lottery is won in the chance zone after the first AT state is completed, and the second AT state is entered. showing. The effect images shown in FIGS. 17 to 19 are, in detail, effect images in the case of the state transition of normal state→first AT state→chance zone→specialized zone→second AT state→chance zone→normal state. is an example. Note that FIGS. 17A to 17D are the same as FIGS. 16A to 16D, so description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 17(e) and 17(f) show effect images of a game in which the 7-aim effect is executed in the chance zone. As shown in FIG. 17(e), the 7 aim effect is an effect that notifies the player to aim at 7 symbols. Image) d24 is displayed. In the game in which the 7 aim effect is executed, when 7 symbols are aligned on a predetermined line and a prize is won, a congratulatory display (for example, a word display such as "Congratulations on 777") d25 is displayed to celebrate the 7 prize winning. In this way, this example of effect shows the case where the AT withdrawal lottery is won in the chance zone (see FIG. 14(b)), and after the chance zone ends, the state shifts to the AT state.

FIG. 18(a) shows an effect image when the chance zone ends. In this example of effect, after the chance zone ends, the state shifts to the AT state, so an end display 2 (for example, word display such as "next time AT") d26 is displayed to inform that the state shifts to the AT state.

FIG. 18(b) shows an effect image after the end display 2d26. In this example of effect, a confirmation display (for example, word display such as "bonus confirmation") d27 is displayed to indicate that it is confirmed that the game will shift to the AT state for the second and subsequent times.

FIGS. 18C to 18E show effect images of the first game in the specialized zone. Specifically, FIG. 18(c) is an effect image immediately after entering the special zone, and FIG. 18(d) is an effect image after the start lever operation for the first game in the special zone is performed. FIG. 18(e) is an effect image at the time of operation after the third stop operation in the first game of the specialized zone.

In the specialized zone, as shown in FIGS. 18(c) to (e), a specialized zone background image d30 is displayed, and a remaining game number display indicating the number of remaining games in the specialized zone (for example, "remaining 5G", Along with the display of words such as "Last") d31, an additional combination display (for example, the words such as "chance combination, press order bell") d32 for informing of possible winning combinations is displayed. In addition, in the first game of the specialized zone, as shown in FIG. 18(d), since the CLR bell was internally won, an operation navigation display d31 showing middle left and right is displayed. As a result, the central left and right stop operations are performed according to the operation navigation display d31, and the CLR bell is won, so as shown in FIG. The added number display d33 is a display showing the added number given in the game of the specialized zone (for example, a word display such as "+213"), and the total added number display d34 is displayed in the 5 games of the specialized zone This is a display (for example, a word display such as "+213") indicating the total value of the added number of sheets. In the first game of the specialized zone in this production example, 213 cards were added.

FIG. 18(f) and FIGS. 19(a)-(b) show effect images of the fifth game in the specialized zone. More specifically, FIG. 18(f) is an effect image after the start lever is operated in the fifth game of the specialized zone, and FIG. 19(a) is the third stop of the fifth game in the specialized zone. FIG. 19B is an effect image at the time of operation after the operation is performed, and FIG. 19B is an effect image at the end of the specialized zone.

In the fifth game in the specialized zone, as shown in FIG. 18(f), since the RCL Bell was internally won, an operation navigation display d31 indicating right, middle, left is displayed. As a result, right, center, and left stop operations are performed according to the operation navigation display d31, and the RCL bell is won, so as shown in FIG. In the fifth game, which is the final game of the specialized zone in this production example, 321 extra coins are added, and the total number of added coins is 544. At the end of the specialization zone, as shown in FIG. 19(b), a specialization zone addition number display (for example, a wording display such as "544 extra") d35 indicates the number of additions given in the entire specialization zone. is displayed. As a result, according to this production example, the second AT state is set to end when the difference number reaches 844 (=initial value 300 + added number 544).

FIG. 19(c) is an effect image when starting the second AT state after the end of the specialized zone, and FIG. 19(d) is an effect image when ending the second AT state. Even in the second AT state, the AT background image d10 is displayed, as shown in FIGS. display) d12 and end condition display (for example, word display such as "remaining 844 sheets") d13 are displayed. In this case, the difference number display d12 is the total value of the difference number of sheets in the AT state for the first time and the second time. Also, when ending the second AT state, a display (for example, display of words such as "next set stock challenge") d14 indicating that the game will shift to the chance state is displayed. In this example of effect, when starting the second AT state, it is informed that the second AT state ends when the difference number of sheets reaches 844 sheets.

FIG. 19(e) is an effect image when the chance zone started after the second AT state ends, and FIG. 19(f) is an effect image in the normal state after the chance zone ends. (normal background image d0). In this production example, since the AT pulling-back lottery was not performed in the chance zone, the state is shifted to the normal state after the end of the chance zone. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 19(e) and (f) are the same as those in FIGS. 16(e) and (f), so description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the embodiment A2, the AT state is taken as an example of a game state that is advantageous to the player, and the game performance related to the continuation of the AT state (the value given in the AT state for the first time is more However, the game state advantageous to the player is not limited to the AT state. For example, as a game feature related to continuation of the pseudo-bonus, the value provided in the second and subsequent pseudo-bonuses may be greater than the value provided in the first pseudo-bonus.

<Summary of Example A2>
(1) As described above, according to the gaming machine (eg, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (eg, Example A2),
A game machine equipped with advantageous state imparting means (eg, main control unit 300, game state control processing S111, etc.) capable of imparting a game state advantageous to a player (eg, AT state, pseudo bonus, etc.),
The advantageous state imparting means imparts one of the advantageous game states (for example, the first AT state), and when the one advantageous game state ends, a new advantageous game state (for example, 2 AT state for the first time) may be given to continue the advantageous game state (for example, FIG. 15),
The advantageous state imparting means is means for imparting the first value as the advantageous gaming state for the first time (for example, there is no additional number in the initial AT state without going through the special zone, and the difference number is 300 and the AT state ends, etc.),
The advantageous state imparting means is means for imparting a second value as a new advantageous gaming state when the advantageous gaming state is continued (for example, the second AT state with passing through the specialized zone There is an additional number of sheets at , and the AT state ends at the difference of 300 sheets plus α, etc.),
said second value is a value greater than said first value,
This is the fifth basic configuration.

According to the fifth basic configuration, more value can be given to the player when the advantageous gaming state continues.

In the fifth basic configuration,
The advantageous state imparting means, when imparting the advantageous gaming state for the first time, imparts a specialized zone (for example, the specialized zone in FIG. 15) with a first probability (for example, AT lottery in winning the strongest cherry Only if you win, you will be given a special zone),
The advantageous state imparting means, when imparting the new advantageous gaming state, imparts the specialized zone with a second probability (for example, when winning an AT withdrawal lottery, the specialized zone is surely imparted. do),
The second probability is a probability greater than the first probability,
The specialized zone is a zone for increasing the value of the advantageous gaming state,
This is referred to as preferred configuration 51 .

According to the preferred configuration 51, when the advantageous game state continues, the specialized zone is likely to be provided, so the expectation for the advantageous game state after the second time can be improved.

In a preferred arrangement 51,
the first probability is greater than 0% and less than 100%;
the second probability is 100%;
This is the preferred configuration 52.

According to the preferred configuration 52, if the advantageous game state continues, the specialized zone is surely given, so that the expectation for the advantageous game state after the second time can be improved.

In a fifth basic configuration, preferred configurations 51-52,
The advantageous state imparting means is means for shifting to a chance zone (for example, a chance zone) where there is a possibility of returning to the advantageous game state after the advantageous game state ends when the advantageous game state is not continued. ,
The chance zone is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous game state, but is more advantageous than the normal game state,
The advantageous state imparting means is means for shifting to the normal game state when the advantageous game state is not imparted in the chance zone (for example, FIG. 15),
This is the preferred configuration 53.

According to the preferred configuration 53, it is possible to add variety to the game while maintaining expectations in the chance zone.

In preferred arrangement 53,
When the advantageous game state is ended and the chance zone is entered, the advantageous state imparting means maintains the advantageous game state in the chance zone regardless of the number of times the advantageous game state is granted. Means for giving probability (for example, FIG. 14 (b)),
is preferred configuration 54 .

According to the preferred configuration 54, it is possible to provide the same feeling of anticipation that the game state can be shifted to an advantageous game state after the second time.

<Other game machines>
The slot machine may be a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals. In this case, the game medium includes electronic data corresponding to medals (hereinafter referred to as game (also called value), the input of gaming value is performed by a predetermined external device (a function that can store the number of lent medals by an electronic method, a function that can store the number of medals won by an electronic method, etc.) input of electronic data from the electronic storage device), and the payout of gaming value includes outputting the electronic data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device) It is a thing.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiments of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. Modifications can be made and those involving such variations and modifications are also intended to be within the scope of the present invention. In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the invention. It is not limited to

[Embodiment B]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one of game machines such as slot machines and pachinko machines, there is a game machine equipped with various notification means (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2005-296354). However, the conventional game machine has room for improvement in the notification means. An object of the present embodiment is to provide a game machine having a characteristic informing means.

An embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

In the slot machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of reels, into which a predetermined number of game media are inserted and on which a plurality of types of symbols are respectively applied, start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the receipt of the rotation start instructing operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of wins is determined by a lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instructing operation, If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if not, the game medium is discarded. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 20 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . In the specification of the present application, the state in which the front door 102 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body 101 may be referred to as "door open" or "open state." The closed (closed) state may be referred to as "door closed" or "closed state".

In this example, by inserting a key owned by the manager of the amusement arcade into the door key hole 140, the front door 102 locked in the closed state can be opened. Therefore, the administrator can unlock the front door 102 (change the closed state to the open state), but a person other than the administrator (for example, a player) cannot unlock the front door 102. .

On the right side of the main body 101, an optical sensor (detecting means, hereinafter also referred to as "open/close sensor", not shown) consisting of a light projecting part and a light receiving part is provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the front door 102 is configured to pass through the space.

The main control unit 300 monitors the states of various sensors 318 including the open/close sensor in the main control timer interrupt process, which will be described later. When the front door 102 is in a closed state and the light shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 is blocked, the open/close sensor outputs a signal ( For example, a low level signal) is output toward the main control unit 300 .

On the other hand, when the front door 102 is in the open state and the light shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where it does not block the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101, the open/close sensor indicates that it is in the open detection state. A signal (for example, a high level signal) is output toward the main control unit 300 .

That is, the open/close sensor is a detecting means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the front door (door body) 102. When the front door 102 is closed, the detection state becomes the closed detection state, and the front door 102 is open. , the detection state becomes the open detection state.

Note that the "detection means" according to the present invention is not limited to optical sensors, and may be, for example, magnetic sensors, proximity switches, micro switches, Hall elements, and the like. Further, it is not limited to switching between the open detection state and the closed detection state as the door body is opened and closed. Conversely, even when the door is in the closed state, the detection state may be the open detection state.

Here, the open/close sensor according to the present example is configured such that the detection state changes to the closed detection state by performing a certain operation even when the front door (door body) 102 is in the open state. Specifically, when the front door 102 is in the open state, a light shielding piece of a certain length is inserted between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 and fixed with tape or the like, and the main body is opened. By shielding the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor 101, even if the front door 102 is open, the detection state of the open/close sensor can be forced to the closed detection state.

The "certain operation" according to the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a DIP switch may be provided to set the open/close sensor to the closed detection state, and the DIP switch may be operated as the predetermined operation. . Further, when the detection means is composed of a magnetic sensor, the detection state of the open/close sensor may be changed to the closed detection state by bringing the magnet closer.

Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed in the center of the main body 101 and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, generally three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the reel window 113 when viewed from the player, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A reel backlight 148 (see FIG. 47, etc.) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the reel window 113 is arranged on the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. and a light-receiving portion, a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated. The valid winning line 114 is determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five winning lines 114 . For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal prize line will be valid, and if two medals are bet, three lines will be valid with the addition of the upper horizontal prize line and the lower horizontal prize line, and the medal will be awarded. When 3 coins are bet, 5 lines obtained by adding a lower right pay line and an upper right pay line may be effective as pay lines. The number of pay lines 114 is not limited to 5. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, the right Five lines, ie, a downward pay line and an upward pay line may be set as valid pay lines, or the same number of pay lines may be uniformly set as valid pay lines regardless of the number of bets.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (more specifically, a bonus combination) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. be. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up. Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, a game in which three medals are inserted may be referred to as a "three-bet game", and a game in which two medals are inserted may be referred to as a "two-bet game".

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an effect device that notifies information about the stop operation (for example, the operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110 to 112. . More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped.

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be called the first stop reel, the reel to be stopped by the second stop operation may be called the second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped by the third stop operation may be called the third stop reel. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137-139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110-112 is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the middle reel 111 as the first stop reel is called " The operation sequence for the stopping operation with the right reel 112 as the first stop reel is called the "reverse pressing operation sequence" or simply "reverse pressing". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be lit to inform the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

A decorative title panel 162 for displaying the model name is provided below the stop button unit 136 . A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. An upper lamp 142 provided on the upper portion of the front door 102 and side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game.

A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (on the side of the player). It is a structure that appears.

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as a effect device that executes effects described later.

The effect button 192 is a button that can be operated when executing a predetermined effect. In the present embodiment, an effect suggesting the provision of a privilege may be executed based on the operation of the effect button 192 .

It should be noted that, even if the display device is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen is rectangular, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control part>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and stopping of the reels. A ROM 306 for storing positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A WDT (watch dog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a random number generation circuit 316 that is activated when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). ).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, The state of the index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, the effect button 192 sensor, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detects a put operation when The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, the L become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (win line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, accumulated number display 125, game information A driving circuit 328 for driving the indicator 126 and the payout number indicator 127 is provided.

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output. In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 detects that the voltage value of the power supply is a predetermined value (this embodiment). 9v), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. Signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. there is This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. are doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like. are provided.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is connected to various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input/output interface. 123, etc.) are connected.

A drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163 is provided in the first sub-control section 400, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. A timer 512 is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The second sub-controller 500 also has a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the second sub-controller 500 as a whole, image display data, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
With reference to FIG. 22(a), the pattern arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of the symbols applied to each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (21 frames numbered 0 to 20 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (eight types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in the present embodiment, the number 1 piece on the left reel 110 has a "replay" symbol, the number 0 piece on the middle reel 111 has a "bell" symbol, and the number 2 piece on the right reel 112 has a "replay" symbol. "Watermelon" pattern is placed on each.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, with reference to FIG. 22(b), the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described. The figure shows the types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the activation or payout of each winning combination. Of the winning combinations in this embodiment, the big bonus (BB1, BB2) and the regular bonus (RB) are bonus combinations that shift to the bonus game, and the replay (replay) is repeated without inserting new medals. Winning hands may be distinguished from winning hands and may be called "working hands" as the hands that can be played. is included. In addition, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the working combination that does not accompany the payout of medals (does not accompany the payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. Bonuses and prizes for replays are included.

Winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include big bonuses (BB1, BB2), regular bonuses (RB), small combinations (cherry, watermelon, bell), and replays. It goes without saying that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

"Big bonus (BB1, BB2)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "BB") is a special combination (operating combination) in which a big bonus game (BB game) is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combinations are "BB1 symbol (also referred to as white 7)-BB1 symbol-BB1 symbol" for BB1 and "BB2 symbol (also referred to as blue 7)-BB2 symbol-BB2 symbol" for BB2. Further, the flag carryover is performed for BB1 and BB2. That is, when BB1 or BB2 is internally won, a flag indicating this is set (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). The state in which the flag indicating internal winning is set is maintained until the next game and thereafter, BB1 and BB2 are internally winning, and the symbol combination "white 7-white 7-white 7" corresponding to BB1 and the symbol corresponding to BB2. The combination "blue 7-blue 7-blue 7" is in a winning state.

"Regular bonus (RB)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "RB") is a special role (operating role) in which a regular bonus game (RB game) is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combination is "RB symbol (also called bonus)-RB symbol-RB symbol". It should be noted that flag carrying over is performed for RB in the same manner as for BB described above. However, in the big bonus game (BB game), the start of the big bonus game is not based on the internal winning of the regular bonus game (RB game) or the display of the symbol combination on the winning line. A regular bonus game may be started later, and the regular bonus game may be automatically started such that when one regular bonus game is finished, the next regular bonus game is immediately started.

"Small wins (cherry, watermelon, bell) (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "cherry", "watermelon", and "bell") are winning wins in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbols The combination is "cherry pattern-ANY pattern-ANY pattern" for cherry, "watermelon pattern-watermelon pattern-watermelon pattern" for watermelon, and "bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern" for bell. Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in FIG. In the case of "cherry symbol-ANY symbol-ANY symbol", the symbol on the left reel 110 may be a "cherry" symbol, and the symbols on the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 may be any symbols.

"Replay" is a prize-winning combination (operating combination) that allows the next game to be played without inserting medals (game media) due to winning, and medals are not paid out. The corresponding symbol combination for the replay is "replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol".

Here, the internal winning probability of the winning combination will be outlined.

The internal winning probability of each role is obtained by combining numerical data corresponding to the range of lottery data associated with each role with numerical data within the range of random numbers acquired during internal lottery (65536 in this embodiment). It is obtained by the value divided by The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination and loss. In the winning combination internal lottery process to be described later, it is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery corresponds to the lottery data corresponding to any combination, and the internal winning combination is determined. In practice, this lottery data is prepared with settings 1 to 6 that differ in the winning probability of at least one combination, and the game parlor staff can arbitrarily select and set any of the set values. .

In the present embodiment, watermelon and cherry are respectively won when the winning combination is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process and when the operation timing of the stop operation is suitable. Hereinafter, watermelon and cherry are also referred to as chance roles. Further, Bell wins a prize when the winning combination is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process and the stop operation is performed in the correct stop operation order. Hereinafter, the bell is also referred to as a pushing role.

The AT state is a game state in which information (details of stop operation) that is advantageous to the player is notified when the player wins an internal win for a chance combination or a push-up combination. In the AT state, the effect image display device 157 and the payout number display 127 are used to execute the operation navigation for informing the content of the stop operation to help win a prize. Specifically, when the winning combination is internally won in the AT state, the stop operation order is announced, and when the chance combination is internally won in the AT state, the timing of the stop operation (suggestion of the internally won combination) is notified. Since the operation navigation is executed, the player can easily win a predetermined small winning combination by following the details of the stop operation of the operation navigation. That is, the AT state is a state in which a large profit is given to the player by operation navigation.

On the other hand, the normal state is a state in which operation navigation is not executed even if the player wins internally for a chance combination or a push-up combination.

In this embodiment, when the AT lottery is won in the normal state, the state is shifted to the AT state. For the A lottery, for example, it may be possible to determine whether or not a winning combination is won based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery. Further, in this embodiment, when the number of games played in the normal state after the end of the AT state reaches a predetermined threshold value (hereinafter referred to as the ceiling number of games), the state is shifted to the AT state. That is, when the AT lottery is won in the normal state, or when the number of games played in the normal state reaches the ceiling number of games, the state is shifted to the AT state, and a predetermined number of AT games is awarded. In the AT state, an AT add-on lottery for adding the number of AT games is performed, and when winning the AT add-on lottery, a predetermined number of AT games is added. On the other hand, in the AT state, when all the given AT game numbers are consumed, the AT state ends and shifts to the normal state.

<Operation of the slot machine>
Next, the processing of the main control section 300, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500 will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

When the slot machine 100 is powered on, first, in step S101, various initial setting processes are performed. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt is disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables to be stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the WDT 314 is permitted to operate, and the initialization is performed. Set values, etc.

In step S102, medal insertion/start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, it is determined by detection by the sensor circuit 320 whether or not there is an electronic medal insertion operation by the bet buttons 130 to 132 or a direct medal insertion operation from the medal insertion slot 141, and if there is an insertion operation lights up the winning line display lamp 120 in accordance with the number of inserted medals. Also, preparations are made to transmit a medal insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-control section 400 . When the player wins the replay role in the previous game, the processing of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so the player does not need to insert medals.

In addition, it checks whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated based on the detection of the sensor circuit 320, and if it is determined that the start operation has been made, the number of inserted medals is determined, and the first sub-control section 400 In response, preparations are made to transmit a start lever acceptance command indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated.

In step S103, a valid pay line is determined.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is acquired.

In step S105, an internal lottery process for a winning combination is performed. In the internal lottery process for the winning combination, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state, and the internal lottery is performed using this table and the random number obtained in step S104. As a result of the internal lottery, when any winning combination (including an operating combination) is internally won, the condition device (flag) of the internally winning combination is operated (the flag of the winning combination is turned ON). Also, in this step S105, preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating the result of the internal winning combination lottery to the first sub-control section 400. FIG. For example, when the watermelon is internally won, preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating that the watermelon is internally won to the first sub-control unit 400, and the result of the internal winning combination lottery is lost (the winning combination is In the case of non-winning), preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating a loss to the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S106, reel stop data is selected based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery in step S105. Operation conditions are also set for the reel stop data of the winning combination for which the order of stop operation is required, and when the reel stop data corresponding to these are selected, the operation conditions are also set.

In step S107, reel rotation start processing for starting rotation of all the reels 110 to 112 is executed based on the start operation.

In step S108, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, it is possible to accept the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when one of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop data of the reel stop data is changed in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. One of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of frames to be drawn set in the stop data. If all the reels 110-112 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S109. In this step S108, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (more specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command, the second stop operation, and the for the stop button reception 2 command, and for the third stop operation, prepare to transmit the stop button reception 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel (Specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop command for the third stop operation 3 command) to the first sub-controller 400.

In step S109, a winning determination process is performed. In the winning determination process, the winning of the symbols stopped by pressing the stop buttons 137 to 139 is determined, and when a combination of symbols corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, the winning. judged to have won the role. For example, if "watermelon pattern - watermelon pattern - watermelon pattern" is aligned on the activated prize line, it is determined that the watermelon prize has been won. Also, in this step S109, preparations are made to transmit a display determination command indicating the result of winning determination to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S110, medal payout processing is performed. In the medal payout process, if the player wins some winning combination with payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out. In step S110, preparations are made to transmit a medal payout command indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S111, game state control processing is performed. In this game state control process, control for shifting the game state is performed. For example, in the case of BB winning, preparations are made so that the BB game can be started from the next time. Also, in this step S111, preparations are made to transmit a game state command indicating the game state to the first sub-control section 400. FIG.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. Various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206 in FIG. 24) of the main controller timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S203, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S205, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S<b>206 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S207, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S203, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S209, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S211, and if the low-voltage signal is off (power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes for ending the timer interrupt ending process are performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S211, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, it returns to the main control unit main processing shown in FIG.

<Processing of the first sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 25(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 25(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 25(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, the main processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 25(a).

When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state.

In step S302, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S303. In step S303, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S304, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S305, effect control processing (details will be described later) is performed. Here, production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408 . This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing updating processing of the effect data when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S307, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for various lamps 420 in the performance data read out in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 422. FIG.

In step S308, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. FIG.

In step S309, information output processing is performed to set the command to be transmitted to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-controller 500 in the effect data read out in step S305, the setting for outputting this control command is made, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 25(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S401 of command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 25(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S501, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 25A and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S502, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S309, the random number value for effect is updated, and the like.

<Processing of the second sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 26A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 26B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 26(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 26(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S3001 of FIG. 26A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S601. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, initialization processing of storage areas in the VRAM 518, and the like are performed.

In step S602, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S603.

In step S603, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S604, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines each command received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S605, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S604, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S606, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the effect data read in step S605, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S602.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 26(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 26(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S801, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 26A and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S802, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing in step S4006 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 26(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S901, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S902, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S903; otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S903, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S901, the CPU 504 obtains image data information (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, etc.) forming the display image. , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516 . The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S905, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. wait for is entered.

In step S906, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Operation check>
Next, operation checks that can be executed by the slot machine 100 will be described.

Here, the operation check is to operate a given effect means (one or a plurality of effect means) among the plurality of effect means provided in the slot machine 100 based on a certain predetermined operation pattern. It is the work of checking (inspecting) whether or not a certain production means is operating based on a certain operation pattern (whether or not there is an abnormality).

<Operation Check/Direction Means (Display Means)>
First, prior to the description of the operation check, the rendering means provided in the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 27(a). FIG. 27(a) is a schematic diagram (front view) showing the main parts of the slot machine 100. FIG.

The slot machine 100 is provided with display means capable of displaying as one of effect means. The display means provided in the slot machine 100 includes, for example, the liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157, the payout number display device 127, the accumulated number display device 125, the game information display device 126, etc., which have been described with reference to FIG. In this example, it is composed of a liquid crystal display device and LEDs.

When the display means is employed as the presentation means, the operation pattern may be, for example, an operation pattern in which the entire display area of the display means is filled with one or more colors, or the display and non-display of the display means are performed at certain time intervals. , an operation pattern for lighting segments of the LED in a certain order, an operation pattern for blinking the LED, an operation pattern for changing the color of the display means, and an operation pattern for displaying in a certain order when there are a plurality of display means. , an operation pattern in which only some display means are displayed when there are a plurality of display means, and the like.

<Operation Check/Direction Means (Sound Output Means)>
The slot machine 100 includes sound output means capable of outputting sound as one of effect means. Sound output means included in the slot machine 100 includes, for example, the speakers 272 and 277 described with reference to FIG.

When the sound output means is employed as the presentation means, the certain operation patterns include, for example, an operation pattern for outputting a certain sound from the sound output means, an operation pattern for changing the volume and frequency of the sound output from the sound output means, Operation pattern for stopping (silencing) sound output from sound output means, operation pattern for outputting sound in a certain order when there are multiple sound output means, partial sound output when there are multiple sound output means An operation pattern or the like in which only the means outputs sound is included.

In the specification of the present application, the sound output means such as the speakers 272 and 277 may be collectively referred to as "speakers", and the operation check of these sound output means may be referred to as "speaker check".

<Operation check/directing means (light emitting means)>
The slot machine 100 is provided with light emitting means capable of emitting (outputting) light as one of effect means. Light-emitting means included in the slot machine 100 include, for example, the upper lamp 142 and side lamps 144 described with reference to FIG. 148, a title panel 162, an effect button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, a start lever 135, etc., and in this example, all light emitting means are composed of LEDs.

When the light emitting means is adopted as the rendering means, the certain operation patterns include, for example, an operation pattern for lighting the LEDs constituting the light emitting means in a certain order, an operation pattern for blinking the LEDs constituting the light emitting means, and an operation pattern for blinking the LEDs constituting the light emitting means. Examples include an operation pattern that changes colors, an operation pattern that emits light in a certain order when there are a plurality of light emitting means, and an operation pattern where only some of the light emitting means are displayed when there are a plurality of light emitting means.

The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, and examples of light-emitting means included in the pachinko machine include frame lamps, effect buttons, accessories, and the like.

<Operation check/Production means (light emitting means)/Upper lamp, Side lamp>
The upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 operate based on a certain operation pattern when the operation check start condition is satisfied (in this example, when the front door 102 is closed and the operation check is performed). (In this example, light emission based on an operation pattern that repeats blue lighting→red lighting→green lighting→blue lighting→ . . . ) can be executed.

On the other hand, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are lit in white when the conditions for starting the operation check are not satisfied (in this example, when the front door 102 is open), and the conditions for starting the operation check are not satisfied. (In this example, when the front door 102 is closed and the operation check is not performed), the light is turned off.

<Operation check/Production means (light emitting means)/Navigation lamp>
The navigation lamps 149a to 149c are operated based on a certain operation pattern (this In an example, it is possible to perform light emission based on an operation pattern that repeats lighting and extinguishing of white light.

On the other hand, the navigation lamps 149a to 149c light up in white when the operation check start conditions are not satisfied (in this example, when the front door 102 is open), and when the operation check start conditions are not satisfied ( In this example, the light is turned off when the front door 102 is closed and the operation check is not performed.

<Operation check/directing means (light emitting means)/reel backlight, title panel>
The reel backlight 148 and the title panel 162 operate based on a certain operation pattern (white lighting in this example) when the operation check start condition is satisfied (in this example, when the operation is checked) light emission based on an operation pattern that repeats turning off and turning off), but if the operation check start conditions are not met (in this example, if the operation check is not targeted), the light will turn off and the front door The opening or closing of 102 is not an operation check condition.

<Operation check/Direction means (light emitting means)/Direction button, Stop button>
The effect button 192 and the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated based on a certain action pattern (in this example, red lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → light emission based on an operation pattern that repeats), but the operation check start condition is not satisfied (in this example, the operation check target ), the light is turned off, and the opening or closing of the front door 102 is not a condition for starting the operation check.

In the specification of the present application, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the reel backlight 148, the navigation lamps 149a to 149c, the production button 192, the stop buttons 137 to 139, the title panel 162, etc. , may be collectively referred to as "LED", and the operation check of these light emitting means may be referred to as "LED check", but the "light emitting means" according to the present invention is not limited to the LED.

In addition, since the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are light-emitting means arranged in the upper region of the slot machine 100, these light-emitting means or one or more LEDs constituting the light-emitting means are collectively referred to as Sometimes referred to as "upper region LEDs" or simply "upper region".

In addition, since the reel backlight 148, the navigation lamps 149a to 149c, the production button 192, and the stop buttons 137 to 139 are light emitting means arranged in the central region of the slot machine 100, these light emitting means or One or a plurality of LEDs constituting the light emitting means may be collectively referred to as "central area LED" or simply "central area".

In addition, since the title panel 162 is a light-emitting means arranged in the lower area of the slot machine 100, these light-emitting means or one or a plurality of LEDs constituting the light-emitting means are collectively referred to as "lower area LED' or simply 'lower region'.

<Operation check/setting change/setting confirmation mode>
Next, before explaining the operation check, the setting change/setting confirmation mode will be explained.

In the game machine according to the present embodiment, when the front door 102 is opened and the power is turned on with the setting key provided inside the main body 101 turned on (or after the power is turned on, a predetermined time has passed) Previously (when the setting key was turned on before the control unit confirmed the on/off state of the setting key), it is possible to shift to a setting change mode in which the setting can be changed.

Here, changing the setting refers to changing the setting value of the gaming machine. Each time a pressing operation of the setting switch) is detected once, the currently set set values 1 to 6 are updated by adding 1, and when the set value exceeds 6, the set value returns to 1 repeatedly. It is possible to change the setting value with .

Further, in the setting change mode, when a pressing operation by the operation means (the start lever 135 in this example) is accepted, the setting value is confirmed, the setting change is completed, and the front door 102 is opened with the setting key turned off. When it is closed, it shifts to a normal game state in which a normal game can be played.

It should be noted that when the operating means (setting switch) is not pressed and the operating means (start lever 135) is operated, or when the operating means (setting switch) is repeatedly pressed down, the setting value is reduced by one cycle (for example, , setting 5 → setting 6 → setting 1 → .

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment can shift to a setting confirmation mode in which setting confirmation is possible when the front door 102 is opened after the power is turned on and the setting key provided inside the main body 101 is turned on. is.

Here, the setting confirmation refers to confirming the setting value of the game machine, and in this example, by pressing the operating means (setting switch), the initially set setting value (for example, setting 1), or By displaying the setting value (one of setting 1 to setting 6) set by setting change on the payout number display 127, it is possible to confirm the setting value.

In the specification of the present application, the setting change mode in which settings can be changed and the setting confirmation mode in which settings can be confirmed may be collectively referred to as the setting change/setting confirmation mode. , a setting change mode in which only setting changes are possible, a setting confirmation mode in which only setting confirmation is possible, and a setting change and setting confirmation mode are included.

<Operation check / power on → menu selection>
FIG. 27B is a diagram showing a display example of the menu screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 in the setting change/setting confirmation mode and a display example of the LED board 101a arranged inside the main body 101. As shown in FIG.

When a setting change operation is performed during the setting change/setting confirmation mode, the set value (any one of setting 1 to setting 6) is displayed on the payout number display 127, as shown in FIG. 27(b). , a numerical value (0 in this example) is displayed on the LED board 101a to indicate that the set value is being changed (undecided). On the other hand, when the setting confirmation operation is performed during the setting change/setting confirmation mode, the number indicating the current setting value (in this example, 3 indicating setting 3) is displayed on the payout number display 127 and the LED board 101a. ) is displayed.

In the setting change/setting confirmation mode of this example, a menu screen (setting screen) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 . By operating the cross key 193b and the OK button 193a (operation means), the store clerk or the like of the amusement arcade can display the setting change history, the error history, the system volume setting, the power saving mode setting, and the operation check on the menu screen (setting screen). Any item can be selected arbitrarily. Needless to say, items that can be selected in the setting change/setting confirmation mode are not limited to this example.

For example, when the setting change history item is selected on the menu screen (setting screen), it is possible to display the history of past setting changes and setting confirmations, and when the error history item is selected, the relevant It is possible to display the history of errors that have occurred in the game machine in the past, and the history of the opening/closing of the front door 102, power-on, power failure/recovery, and the like.

In addition, when the system volume setting item is selected on the menu screen (setting screen), the maximum volume that can be set only by an administrator such as a store clerk or an error (for example, opening the front door 102) occurs. When the power saving mode setting item is selected, the power saving mode setting (for example, the volume setting of the speakers 272 and 277, the LED (simplified setting of brightness, etc.) is possible. Details of the system volume setting and the power saving mode setting will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 to 46. FIG.

Further, when an operation check item is selected on the menu screen (setting screen), it is possible to check the operation of the LEDs and speakers 272 and 277 provided in the slot machine 100 . This operation check will be described in detail below.

According to this example, since the operation check can be performed while the settings are being changed or while the settings are being checked, only the store clerk or the like of the amusement arcade can check the operation. You may be able to prevent the situation.

<Selection of operation check/operation check>
FIG. 27(c) is a diagram showing a display example when the operation check MC item is temporarily selected on the menu screen, and FIG. 27(d) shows an OK button when the operation check MC item is temporarily selected. It is the figure which showed the example of a display after pressing 193a.

When the item of operation check MC is temporarily selected on the menu screen and the OK button 193a is pressed, the operation check menu screen MCM is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 as shown in FIG. 27(d). A store clerk or the like can arbitrarily select either the LED check LC or the speaker check SC on the operation check menu screen MCM by operating the cross key 193b or the OK button 193a.

According to this example, during the operation check of the first certain effect means (LED), it is impossible to check the operation of the second certain effect means, and the operation of the second certain effect means (speaker) Since it is impossible to check the operation of the first certain effect means during the check, it is possible to check the operation of each effect means more reliably.

<Operation check/LED check>
FIG. 28(a) is a diagram showing a display example after the OK button 193a is pressed with the LED check LC item provisionally selected on the operation check menu screen MCM described with reference to FIG. 27(d). is.

When the LED check LC item is temporarily selected on the operation menu screen MCM and the OK button 193a is pressed, the LED check area menu screen LEM is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 as shown in FIG. 28(a). . By operating the cross key 193b and the OK button 193a, the amusement store clerk or the like selects the LED operation check target areas (in this example, the upper area AE, the middle area CE, the lower area UE) can be arbitrarily selected.

The upper area in the LED check area menu screen LEM indicates the operation check of the LEDs arranged in the upper area of the slot machine 100 (in this example, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144). If it is desired to check the operation of the lamp 142 and the side lamp 144), as shown in FIG. 28B, the OK button 193a is pressed after temporarily selecting the item of the upper area UE.

FIG. 28(b) is a diagram showing a display example after the OK button 193a is pressed while the item in the upper area AE is provisionally selected on the LED check area menu screen LEM shown in FIG. 28(a). .

In this example, since the item of the upper area AE is selected, the LEDs (upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144) arranged in the upper area are subject to the operation check, and the liquid crystal display device 157 displays the LEDs in the upper area. A display (in this example, display of a character string "Checking upper/side lamps") is displayed to notify that the check is in progress, and the LED check of the upper area is started.

The central area of the LED check area menu screen LEM refers to LEDs arranged in the central area of the slot machine 100 (in this example, the reel backlight 148, the navigation lamps 149a to 149c, the effect button 192, and the stop button 137 ~ 139) shows the operation check of these LEDs (reel backlight 148, navigation lamps 149a ~ 149c, effect button 192, and stop buttons 137 ~ 139) If you want to check the operation, the central area After temporarily selecting the CE item, the OK button 193a is pressed.

FIG. 28(c) is a diagram showing a display example after the OK button 193a is pressed while the item in the central area CE is temporarily selected on the LED check area menu screen LEM shown in FIG. 28(a). be.

In this example, since the item in the central area CE is selected, the LEDs (reel backlight 148, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, effect button 192, and stop buttons 137 to 139) arranged in the central area operate. The object of the check is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 to notify that the LED in the central area is being checked (in this example, the character string "backlight/reel lower lamp button checking" is displayed). At the same time, the LED check of the central area is started.

The lower area in the LED check area menu screen LEM indicates the operation check of the LEDs (the title panel 162 in this example) arranged in the lower area of the slot machine 100, and these LEDs (the title panel 162) are checked. To perform an operation check, the user temporarily selects an item in the lower area UE, and then presses the OK button 193a.

FIG. 28(d) is a diagram showing a display example after the OK button 193a is pressed while the item in the lower area UE is temporarily selected on the LED check area menu screen LEM shown in FIG. 28(a). .

In this example, since the item in the lower area UE is selected, the LEDs (title panel 162) arranged in the lower area are subject to the operation check, and the LEDs in the lower area of the liquid crystal display device 157 are being checked. A display (in this example, the display of a character string "Checking title panel") is made to notify that, and an LED check in the lower area is started.

According to this example, since a certain effect means arranged in an area in which the motion check is not executed does not execute a motion based on a certain motion pattern, the effect means that is the object of the motion check is easier to understand, and the operation check can be performed more reliably.

<Operation check/speaker check>
FIG. 29(a) is a diagram showing a display example after the OK button 193a is pressed with the speaker check item SC provisionally selected on the operation check menu screen MCM shown in FIG. 27(d).

When the speaker check SC item is temporarily selected on the operation menu screen MCM and the OK button 193a is pressed, as shown in FIG. (In this example, a character string "checking speaker" is displayed), and speaker check is started. Details of the speaker check will be described later with reference to FIG. 34 and the like.

<Operation check/LED check in upper area (door open)>
FIGS. 29(b), (c) and 30(a)-(c) show the flow until the LED check of the upper area is selected with the door open in the setting change/setting confirmation mode in chronological order. It is a diagram indicated by .

The state shown in FIG. 29B is a state in which the power is turned on with the front door 102 opened and the setting key provided inside the main body 101 turned on.

In this state, since the front door 102 is opened, the door opening notification for notifying the door opening has started. and part of the LEDs (navigation lamps 149a to 149c) in the central area are lit in white.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 29(c) is a state in which the operation check MC item is provisionally selected on the menu screen, and the state shown in FIG. 30(a) is a state in which the operation check MC item is provisionally selected. This is the state after the button 193a is pressed, and the state shown in FIG. 30B is the state after the OK button 193a is pressed with the LED check LC item provisionally selected.

In this example, since the door is open in both states, the door open notification is continued, and the LED in the upper area (upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144) and part of the LED in the central area (navi lamp 149a ~ 149c) is illuminated in white.

The state shown in FIG. 30(c) is a state in which the OK button 193a is pressed while the item in the upper area AE is provisionally selected on the LED check area menu screen LEM shown in FIG. 30(b).

In this example, since the item of the upper area AE is selected, the LEDs (upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144) arranged in the upper area are subject to the operation check, and the liquid crystal display device 157 displays the LEDs in the upper area. A display to notify that the check is in progress is performed (in this example, the character string "Checking the upper and side lamps" is displayed), but since the door open notification has priority over the LED check, the LED in the upper area The door open notification is continued without starting the check, and the LEDs in the upper area (upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144) and part of the LEDs in the central area (navigation lamps 149a to 149c) are lit in white.

According to this example, some of the effects means (upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144) cannot be checked for operation when the door is open. On the other hand, it is possible to encourage the door to be closed and to check the operation of the performance means without fail, thereby preventing troubles of the performance means.

Further, since the door opening notification can be executed even during the LED check, the performance means can be checked for operation while informing the outside that the door is open.

In addition, since the mode of the door open notification and the LED check are different, the difference between the door open notification and the operation check can be easily distinguished, and the convenience can be improved.

<Operation check/LED check in upper area (door closed)>
FIGS. 30(d) and 31(a)-(c) show the state in which the door is closed, and after the LED check of the upper region is selected, the door is closed and the LED check of the upper region is executed. It is the figure which showed the flow in time series.

The state shown in FIG. 30(d) is the door closed state described with reference to FIG. 30(c), in which the LED check of the upper area is selected and the door is closed.

In this state, since the front door 102 is closed while the LED check of the upper area is selected, the door open notification is terminated.

In addition, since the LEDs of the upper area (upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144) satisfy the operation check start condition (the front door 102 is closed and the operation check is performed), the LED check of the upper area However, some of the LEDs in the central area (navigation lamps 149a to 149c) do not meet the operation check start conditions (the front door 102 is closed and is not subject to operation check) to turn off.

As described above, in the LED check of the upper area, the operation is based on a certain operation pattern (in this example, light emission is based on an operation pattern that repeats blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → blue lighting → . . . ). is executable.

Specifically, in the LED check of the upper area, as shown in FIG. 30(d), the LEDs of the upper area (upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144) are lit in blue, and the LEDs are turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). After that, as shown in FIG. 31(a), the LEDs in the upper region (upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144) are turned on in red, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed, the lamp is turned on as shown in FIG. 31(b). As shown, the LEDs in the upper area (upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144) are lit in green, and thereafter, lighting is repeatedly performed in this order.

<Operation check/LED check in central area (door closed)>
FIGS. 31(c), (d) and FIGS. 31(a), (b) show that the door is closed, the central region LED check is selected during the upper region LED check, and the central region LED check is performed. is a diagram showing the flow until is executed in chronological order.

In the state shown in FIG. 31(c), the LED check in the central area is temporarily selected during the LED check in the upper area, which has been described with reference to FIGS. 30(d), 31(a) and (b) FIG. 31(d) is a diagram showing a display example after the OK button 193a is pressed with the item in the central area CE provisionally selected.

In the state shown in FIG. 31(d), the LEDs (reel backlight 148, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, effect button 192, and stop buttons 137 to 139) in the central region satisfy the operation check start condition (front door 102 has been closed and is subject to an operational check), the central region LED check is initiated.

As described above, in the LED check of some LEDs (navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlight 148) in the central area, an operation based on a certain operation pattern (in this example, an operation pattern that blinks white) LED check of some other LEDs (production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139) in the central area can be executed based on a certain operation pattern (in this example, red lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → . . . is repeated).

Specifically, in the LED check of some LEDs (navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlight 148) in the central area, as shown in FIG. Lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlight 148) are lit in white, and after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 149a to 149c and the reel backlight 148) are extinguished, and white lighting and extinguishing are repeated thereafter.

Also, in the LED check of some other LEDs in the central area (effect button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139), some other LEDs in the central area (effect button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139) are lit in red, and after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139) are lit in blue, and after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 192, stop buttons 137 to 139) are lit in green, and thereafter, lighting is repeatedly performed in this order.

According to this example, the operation can be checked even when the door is closed, so convenience can be improved. In addition, since LEDs other than those subject to operation check are extinguished, the area subject to operation check can be easily identified, and the operation check can be performed quickly.

<Operation check/LED check in central area (door closed → door open)>
FIG. 32(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the door is opened while the central area LED check is being performed with the door closed.

In this state, since the front door 102 is opened, the door opening notification for notifying the door opening has started. and part of the LEDs (navigation lamps 149a to 149c) in the central area are lit in white.

While the door is closed, some of the LEDs (navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlight 148) in the central area are repeatedly turned on and off in white, but the door open notification has priority over the LED check. Therefore, while the door is open, the LED check of the navigation lamps 149a to 149c (white lighting and extinguishing) is interrupted, and the door open notification (white lighting) is preferentially executed.

According to this example, some of the production means (navigation lamps 149a to 149c) cannot be checked for operation when the door is open. , the door can be closed and the operation check of the performance means can be urged, and the occurrence of malfunction of the performance means can be prevented.

Further, since the door opening notification can be executed even during the LED check, the performance means can be checked for operation while informing the outside that the door is open.

In addition, since the mode of the door open notification and the LED check are different, the difference between the door open notification and the operation check can be easily distinguished, and the convenience can be improved.

<Operation check/LED check in central area (door open → door closed)>
FIG. 32(d) is a diagram showing a state in which the door is closed while the central area LED check is being performed with the door open.

In this state, since the front door 102 is closed, the door open notification for notifying the door opening has ended, the door open notification (lighting in white) of the navigation lamps 149a to 149c is ended, and the LED check (white lighting and extinguishing) is resumed.

In addition, the LED check of the navigation lamps 149a to 149c may be resumed from the beginning of white lighting, may be restarted from the beginning of white extinguishing, and while the door is open, the LED check (white lighting and lights off) may run in the background and resume from what was running in the background (e.g., halfway through the white light) when the door is closed. That is, before the door is opened, the navigation lamps 149a to 149c and the LED check (lighting mode) of the reel backlight 148 are synchronized, but after the door is opened, only the LED check of the navigation lamps 149a to 149c is interrupted. After the door is closed again, the navigation lamps 149a to 149c and the LED check (lighting mode) of the reel backlight 148 may be asynchronous.

<Operation check/Lower area LED check (door closed)>
FIGS. 33(a) to (c) show the flow from the selection of the LED check for the lower area to the execution of the LED check for the lower area during the execution of the LED check for the central area (door closed). It is a diagram.

The state shown in FIG. 33(a) is a state in which the LED check in the lower area is temporarily selected during the LED check in the central area, and FIG. 33(b) is a state in which an item in the lower area UE is temporarily selected. 19 is a diagram showing a display example after an OK button 193a is pressed in .

In the state shown in FIG. 33(b), the LEDs in the lower area (title panel 162) satisfy the operation check start condition (become the target of the operation check), so the LED check in the lower area is started.

As described above, in the LED check of the LEDs in the lower area (title panel 162), it is possible to execute an operation based on a certain operation pattern (in this example, light emission based on an operation pattern that repeats white lighting and extinguishing). .

Specifically, in the LED check of the lower area LED (title panel 162), as shown in FIG. 5 seconds), the LEDs (title panel 162) in the lower area are turned off as shown in FIG.

According to this example, the operation can be checked even when the door is closed, so convenience can be improved. In addition, since LEDs other than those subject to operation check are extinguished, the area subject to operation check can be easily identified, and the operation check can be performed quickly.

<Operation check/Lower area LED check (door closed → door open)>
FIG. 33(d) is a diagram showing a state in which the door is opened while the LED check of the lower area is being performed with the door closed.

In this state, since the front door 102 is opened, the door opening notification for notifying the door opening has started. and part of the LEDs (navigation lamps 149a to 149c) in the central area are lit in white.

On the other hand, since the LEDs in the lower area (title panel 162) are not affected by the opening and closing of the door, they continue to check the LEDs (white lighting and extinguishing) even while the door is open.

<Operation check/speaker check (door open)>
FIG. 34(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the speaker check SC item is provisionally selected on the operation check menu screen MCM described with reference to FIG. 27(d).

In this state, since the front door 102 is open, the door opening notification for notifying the door opening is started. ) and part of the LEDs in the central area (navigation lamps 149a to 149c) are lit in white, and a door opening sound (in this example, the sound “the door is open”) is output from a speaker (not shown). ing.

FIG. 34B is a diagram showing a display example after the OK button 193a is pressed with the speaker check item SC provisionally selected on the operation check menu screen MCM.

When the speaker check SC item is provisionally selected on the operation menu screen MCM and the OK button 193a is pressed, a display (in this example, "speaker checking") is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 to notify that the speaker check is in progress. (display of a character string of ), and the speaker check is started.

In the speaker check in this example, an operation based on a certain operation pattern (in this example, an operation that repeats audio output from the lower right speaker → audio output from the lower left speaker → audio output from the upper speaker → audio output from the lower right speaker → …) pattern-based audio output) can be performed.

Specifically, in the speaker check, as shown in FIG. 34(b), a check sound (in this example, "lower right speaker under test") is emitted from the lower right speaker arranged at the front right of the slot machine 100. After a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed, a check sound (in this example, " lower left speaker testing"), and after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, a check sound ( In this example, a voice saying "upper speaker test in progress") is output, and thereafter, the voice is repeatedly output in this order.

In this example, since the door is being opened, the check sound by the speaker check is output from each speaker in turn, and the door opening sound is output from all the speakers.

According to this example, the first certain effect means (LED) can switch the target part of the operation check in the operation check by operating the operation means, and the second certain effect means (Speaker), in the operation check, the target part of the operation check is automatically switched without depending on the operation by the operation means, so it is possible to automatically switch to the production means that you want to check the operation reliably and easily check the operation. It is possible to separate the effect means to be performed, and it is possible to enhance the convenience of the operation check.

Also, during the operation check of the first certain effect means (LED), it is impossible to check the operation of the second certain effect means, and during the operation check of the second certain effect means (speaker), First, since it is impossible to check the operation of a certain effect means, it is possible to check the operation of each effect means more reliably.

In addition, it is necessary to visually check the operation of the light emitting means (LED), and it is possible to manually switch the target of the operation check to ensure the operation check, and to check the operation of the sound output means (speaker) by ear. All you have to do is confirm, and you can easily check the operation by automatically switching the target of the operation check.

In addition, in the operation check, the operation check sound can be output while the door opening notification sound is being output. Therefore, the operation check can be performed simultaneously while informing the outside of the opening of the door, and the convenience can be improved.

<Operation check/speaker check (door open → door closed)>
FIG. 35(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the door is closed while the speaker check is being performed with the door open.

In this state, since the front door 102 is closed, the output of the door opening sound is terminated. On the other hand, since the speaker check is not affected by the opening and closing of the door, the speaker check that was being executed while the door is open is canceled. continuing.

<Operation check/setting key operation>
FIGS. 35(b) to (d) show the operation of the lever for finalizing the setting during the execution of the LED check (door open) in the central area until the front door 102 is closed before the setting key is returned. It is the figure which showed the flow.

As described above, in the slot machine 100, in the setting change/setting confirmation mode, when a pressing operation by the operating means (start lever 135) is accepted, the setting value is confirmed, the setting change is completed, and the setting key is turned off. When the front door 102 is closed in the state (the setting key is returned to the initial position), the game shifts to the normal game state in which the normal game can be played.

However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35(d), the front door 102 is closed while the setting key is on (the setting key is not returned to the initial position) during the execution of the LED check of the central area. Since it is closed, it does not shift to the normal game state and the demo screen is not displayed.

Since the operation check can be executed during setting change or setting confirmation, there are cases where the door is closed without changing the setting value of the original setting value. By continuously displaying , it is possible to notify that the normal game is not possible, so there are cases where it is possible to tell the hall clerk if he forgot to change the setting or remove the setting key.

FIGS. 36A to 36C are diagrams showing the flow from the release of the setting key to the closing of the front door 102 during execution of the LED check (door open) of the central area.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 36(b) and 36(c), the front door 102 is operated while the setting key is turned off (the setting key is returned to the initial position) while the central area LED check is being performed. is closed, the normal game state is entered and the demo screen is displayed.

In addition, since the setting change/setting confirmation mode has ended and the state has shifted to the normal game state, the operation check (LED check and speaker check) is forcibly ended, and the LED changes from light emission based on the LED check to light emission for production. The light emission changes to that based on the mode, and the speaker changes from the sound output based on the speaker check to the sound output based on the performance sound mode.

According to this example, the operation check can be executed during setting change or setting confirmation accompanying the operation of the setting key, and the operation check is executed in relation to turning off the setting key from on during the operation check. Since it is terminated, it can be terminated without waiting for the completion of the operation check.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 20) includes a door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 20) and production means (for example , Upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlight 148 of each reel 110 to 112, title panel 162, effect button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, etc. Light emitting means, speakers 272, 277, etc. sound output means, display means such as a liquid crystal display device 157), and the production means is an operation based on a certain operation pattern (for example, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144). includes a certain effect means capable of executing light emission based on an operation pattern that repeats blue lighting → red lighting → green lighting → blue lighting → . . . is placed at a position where it is possible to check the action from the front (hereinafter referred to as "action check"), and a part of the certain effect means (for example, the reel backlight 148 of each reel 110 to 112, the title Panel 162, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139) can be checked for operation while the door is open, and some of the production means (for example, upper lamp 142, The side lamp 144 and the navigation lamps 149a to 149c) are game machines characterized in that the operation check cannot be performed when the door is open.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, some of certain production means cannot check the operation while the door is open. can be urged to reliably check the operation of the performance means by closing, and the occurrence of malfunction of the performance means can be prevented.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 20) includes a door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. , side lamps 144, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlights 148 of each reel 110 to 112, title panel 162, effect button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, etc. light emitting means, speakers 272, 277, etc. sound output means, A display means such as a liquid crystal display device 157), and the effect means operates based on a certain operation pattern (for example, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144). lighting → lighting in red → lighting in green → lighting in blue → light emission based on an operation pattern that repeats), and the certain production means can execute the lighting from the front of the game machine. It is arranged at a position where it is possible to check the operation (hereinafter referred to as "operation check"), and a part of the certain effect means (for example, the reel backlight 148 of each reel 110 to 112, the title panel 162, the effect Button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139) can check the operation while the door is open, and some of the production means (eg, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, The navigation lamps 149a to 149c) indicate that the operation check cannot be performed while the door is open, and that the operation check can be performed during at least one of setting change and setting confirmation. It is a game table that features.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, some of certain production means cannot check the operation while the door is open. can be urged to reliably check the operation of the performance means by closing, and the occurrence of malfunction of the performance means can be prevented. In addition, since the operation check can be performed while the settings are being changed or while the settings are being checked, only the game store clerk or the like can check the operation, and in addition, it is possible to prevent unintentional setting changes. Sometimes.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 20) includes a door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. , side lamps 144, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlights 148 of each reel 110 to 112, title panel 162, effect button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, etc. light emitting means, speakers 272, 277, etc. sound output means, A display means such as a liquid crystal display device 157), and the effect means operates based on a certain operation pattern (for example, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144). lighting → lighting in red → lighting in green → lighting in blue → light emission based on an operation pattern that repeats), and the certain production means can execute the lighting from the front of the game machine. It is arranged at a position where it is possible to check the operation (hereinafter referred to as "operation check"), and is part of the certain effect means (hereinafter referred to as "first certain effect means". For example, each reel 110 112 reel backlight 148, title panel 162, production button 192, and stop buttons 137-139) are capable of checking the operation while the door is open. Some (hereinafter referred to as "second certain effect means". For example, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the navigation lamps 149a to 149c) cannot be checked for operation when the door is open. The first certain effect means and the second certain effect means are arranged in different areas on the game table, the operation can be checked for each area, and the door is closed. In the state where the motion check is not performed, the first certain effect means and the second certain effect means arranged in the area not executing the motion check do not perform the motion based on the certain motion pattern. It is a game machine characterized by

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, some of certain production means cannot check the operation while the door is open. can be urged to reliably check the operation of the performance means by closing, and the occurrence of malfunction of the performance means can be prevented. In addition, in the operation check, since a certain effect means arranged in an area where the operation check is not executed does not execute an operation based on a certain operation pattern, the object of the operation check is easy to understand. , the operation check can be performed more reliably.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 20) includes a door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. , side lamps 144, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlights 148 of each reel 110 to 112, title panel 162, effect button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, etc. light emitting means, speakers 272, 277, etc. sound output means, A display means such as a liquid crystal display device 157), and the effect means operates based on a certain operation pattern (for example, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144). lighting → lighting in red → lighting in green → lighting in blue → light emission based on an operation pattern that repeats), and the certain production means can execute the lighting from the front of the game machine. It is arranged at a position where it is possible to check the operation (hereinafter referred to as "operation check"), and is part of the certain effect means (hereinafter referred to as "first certain effect means". For example, each reel 110 112 reel backlight 148, title panel 162, production button 192, and stop buttons 137-139) are capable of checking the operation while the door is open. Part (hereinafter referred to as "second certain production means".
For example, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the navigation lamps 149a to 149c) cannot be checked for operation when the door is open, and the first certain production means and the second production means A certain effect means is arranged in different areas on the game table, the operation check is possible for each area, and the operation check is not executed in the state where the door is closed. The first certain effect means and the second certain effect means do not execute the action based on the certain action pattern, and the second certain effect means is the same as when the door is opened. The game machine is capable of executing a door open notification suggesting that the door is open in a state where the game machine is in a closed state.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, some of certain production means cannot check the operation while the door is open. can be urged to reliably check the operation of the performance means by closing, and the occurrence of malfunction of the performance means can be prevented. In addition, in the operation check, since a certain effect means arranged in an area where the operation check is not executed does not execute an operation based on a certain operation pattern, the object of the operation check is easy to understand. , the operation check can be performed more reliably. In addition, since the door opening notification can be executed, it is possible to check the operation of the presentation means while informing the outside that the door is open.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 20) includes a door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. , side lamps 144, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlights 148 of each reel 110 to 112, title panel 162, effect button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, etc. light emitting means, speakers 272, 277, etc. sound output means, A display means such as a liquid crystal display device 157), and the effect means operates based on a certain operation pattern (for example, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144). lighting → lighting in red → lighting in green → lighting in blue → light emission based on an operation pattern that repeats), and the certain production means can execute the lighting from the front of the game machine. It is arranged at a position where it is possible to check the operation (hereinafter referred to as "operation check"), and is part of the certain effect means (hereinafter referred to as "first certain effect means". For example, each reel 110 112 reel backlight 148, title panel 162, production button 192, and stop buttons 137-139) are capable of checking the operation while the door is open. Some (hereinafter referred to as "second certain effect means". For example, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the navigation lamps 149a to 149c) cannot be checked for operation when the door is open. The first certain effect means and the second certain effect means are arranged in different areas on the game table, the operation can be checked for each area, and the door is opened. that the second certain effect means arranged in the area in which the operation check is not executed in the state where the door is open can execute the door open notification suggesting that the door is open. It is a game table that features.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, some of certain production means cannot check the operation while the door is open. can be urged to reliably check the operation of the performance means by closing, and the occurrence of malfunction of the performance means can be prevented. In addition, since the door opening notification can be executed, it is possible to check the operation of the presentation means while informing the outside that the door is open.

In addition, the certain effect means includes a plurality of light emitting means capable of emitting light (eg, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlight 148 of each reel 110 to 112, title panel 162, light emitting means such as production button 192 and stop buttons 137 to 139; sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277; display means such as liquid crystal display device 157). It includes two light emitting means, and the first light emitting means (for example, the reel backlight 148 of each reel 110 to 112, the title panel 162, the production button 192, the stop buttons 137 to 139) has the door opened. The operation can be checked in the state, and the second light emitting means (eg, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the navigation lamps 149a to 149c) executes the operation in the state in which the door is open. 29 (for example, FIG. 29 ( b) can be executed, and the door open notification is based on an operation pattern different from the certain operation pattern (for example, LEDs in the upper area (upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144) and It may be part of the LEDs in the central area (the navigation lamps 149a to 149c are lit in white).

With such a configuration, the door opening notification can be executed, so that the operation of the first light emitting means can be checked while informing the outside that the door is open.

In addition, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged in different areas on the game machine, and the operation can be checked for each area, and the second light emitting means is arranged in the state where the door is closed. Operation check may be possible.

With such a configuration, it is possible to check the operation even when the door is closed, so convenience can be enhanced.

Further, the light-emitting means arranged in the area in which the operation check is not performed may be extinguished when the door is closed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy to understand the target area of the operation check, and to quickly perform the operation check.

In addition, when the door is open, the first light emitting means arranged in the area in which the operation check is not performed is extinguished, and when the door is open, the operation check is performed. The second light-emitting means arranged in the area not performing the above-described door opening notification may be performed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy to understand the target area of the operation check, and to quickly perform the operation check.

Further, the certain operation pattern is a blinking pattern that causes the light emitting means to blink in one or more colors (for example, an operation pattern that repeats blue lighting → red lighting → green lighting → blue lighting → . . . ). Alternatively, the door open notification may be an operation of lighting the second light emitting means in a certain color (for example, lighting in white).

With such a configuration, the difference between the door open notification and the operation check can be distinguished in an easy-to-understand manner, and convenience can be enhanced.

In addition, a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157) is provided, and when the power is turned on with the setting key turned from off to on (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), the setting can be changed. , a part of the setting change operation can be performed with the door opened, and in the first case, the display means displays an operation check setting screen (for example, , and the operation check menu screen MCM) shown in FIG. Even if the door is closed after the effect display is started and the setting change is completed, the effect display is not started and the operation check setting screen is displayed when the setting key is off. It may be displayed continuously.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to change the setting, and it may be possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (eg, slot machine 100, pachinko machine shown in FIG. 20) includes operation means (eg, cross key 193b, OK button 193a) and effect means (eg, upper lamp 142, side Lamp 144, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlight 148 of each reel 110 to 112, title panel 162, effect button 192, light emitting means such as stop buttons 137 to 139, sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277, liquid crystal display and a display means such as a device 157), wherein the effect means includes a certain effect means capable of executing an action based on a certain action pattern, and the certain effect means includes the It is arranged at a position where the action can be checked from the front of the game table (hereinafter referred to as "action check"), and the certain effect means is composed of a plurality of areas, and the action can be checked for each area. and a part of the certain effect means (hereinafter referred to as "first certain effect means". For example, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the navigation lamps 149a to 149c, the reels of the reels 110 to 112 Light emitting means such as backlight 148, title panel 162, effect button 192, stop buttons 137-139, etc.), in the operation check, the areas to be checked for operation (for example, upper area, central area, lower area ) can be switched by operating the operation means, and a part of the certain production means (hereinafter referred to as “second certain production means”. For example, sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277 ) is characterized in that, in the operation check, the areas (for example, lower right, lower left, upper part) subject to the operation check are automatically switched without being operated by the operation means. .

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first certain production means can switch the area to be checked by the operation means in the operation check, and the second certain production means can switch the area to be checked by the operation means. In the operation check, since the target area of the operation check is automatically switched without depending on the operation by the operation means, the production means automatically switches to the production means that the operation check is to be surely performed, so that the operation check can be easily performed. The effect means desired to be performed can be separated, and the convenience of operation check can be improved.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (eg, slot machine 100, pachinko machine shown in FIG. 20) includes operation means (eg, cross key 193b, OK button 193a) and effect means (eg, upper lamp 142, side Lamp 144, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlight 148 of each reel 110 to 112, title panel 162, effect button 192, light emitting means such as stop buttons 137 to 139, sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277, liquid crystal display and a display means such as a device 157), wherein the effect means includes a certain effect means capable of executing an action based on a certain action pattern, and the certain effect means includes the It is arranged at a position where the action can be checked from the front of the game table (hereinafter referred to as "action check"), and the certain effect means is composed of a plurality of areas, and the action can be checked for each area. and a part of the certain effect means (hereinafter referred to as "first certain effect means". For example, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the navigation lamps 149a to 149c, the reels of the reels 110 to 112 Light emitting means such as backlight 148, title panel 162, effect button 192, stop buttons 137-139, etc.), in the operation check, the areas to be checked for operation (for example, upper area, central area, lower area ) can be switched by operating the operation means, and a part of the certain production means (hereinafter referred to as “second certain production means”. For example, sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277 ), in the operation check, the area (for example, lower right, lower left, upper part) subject to the operation check is automatically switched without being operated by the operation means, and the first certain production means During the operation check, the operation check of the second certain effect means is impossible, and during the operation check of the second certain effect means, the operation of the first certain effect means This game machine is characterized in that it is impossible to check.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first certain production means can switch the area to be checked by the operation means in the operation check, and the second certain production means can switch the area to be checked by the operation means. In the operation check, since the target area of the operation check is automatically switched without depending on the operation by the operation means, the production means automatically switches to the production means that the operation check is to be surely performed, so that the operation check can be easily performed. The effect means desired to be performed can be separated, and the convenience of operation check can be improved. Also, during the operation check of the first certain effect means, it is impossible to check the operation of the second certain effect means, and during the operation check of the second certain effect means, the first certain effect is not possible. Since it is impossible to check the operation of the means, it is possible to check the operation of each effect means more reliably.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (eg, slot machine 100, pachinko machine shown in FIG. 20) includes operation means (eg, cross key 193b, OK button 193a) and effect means (eg, upper lamp 142, side Lamp 144, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlight 148 of each reel 110 to 112, title panel 162, effect button 192, light emitting means such as stop buttons 137 to 139, sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277, liquid crystal display and a display means such as a device 157), wherein the effect means includes a certain effect means capable of executing an action based on a certain action pattern, and the certain effect means includes the It is arranged at a position where the action can be checked from the front of the game table (hereinafter referred to as "action check"), and the certain effect means is composed of a plurality of areas, and the action can be checked for each area. and a part of the certain effect means (hereinafter referred to as "first certain effect means". For example, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the navigation lamps 149a to 149c, the reels of the reels 110 to 112 Light emitting means such as backlight 148, title panel 162, effect button 192, stop buttons 137-139, etc.), in the operation check, the areas to be checked for operation (for example, upper area, central area, lower area ) can be switched by operating the operation means, and a part of the certain production means (hereinafter referred to as “second certain production means”. For example, sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277 ), in the operation check, the area (for example, lower right, lower left, upper part) to be the target of the operation check is automatically switched without being operated by the operation means, and the operation check is performed by operating a setting key. at least one of setting change and setting confirmation during execution of the operation check, and the operation check is completed in relation to turning the setting key from on to off during the operation check. It is a game table that features.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first certain production means can switch the area to be checked by the operation means in the operation check, and the second certain production means can switch the area to be checked by the operation means. In the operation check, since the target area of the operation check is automatically switched without depending on the operation by the operation means, the production means automatically switches to the production means that the operation check is to be surely performed, so that the operation check can be easily performed. The effect means desired to be performed can be separated, and the convenience of operation check can be improved. In addition, since the operation check can be executed during setting change or setting confirmation accompanying the operation of the setting key, and the operation check ends in relation to turning off the setting key from on to off during the operation check, It can be terminated without waiting for the completion of the operation check.

Further, the first certain effect means may be a plurality of sound output means capable of outputting sound, and the second certain effect means may be a plurality of light emitting means capable of emitting light.

With such a configuration, it is necessary to check the operation of the light emitting means visually, and the operation check can be reliably performed by manually switching the target of the operation check, and the operation check of the sound output means can be checked by ear. All you have to do is confirm, and you can easily check the operation by automatically switching the target of the operation check.

In addition, a door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102) is provided, and the sound output means outputs a door opening notification sound (for example, A sound such as "the door is open" or a warning sound such as beep) can be executed, and the certain operation pattern is a sound capable of specifying the area to be checked for the operation (for example, 34, an operation check sound including a sound such as "lower right speaker being tested" → "lower left speaker being tested" → "upper speaker being tested") is output from the sound output means, and the door The open notification sound is a sound different from the operation check sound, and the sound output means is capable of performing the operation check while the door is open, and outputs the door open notification sound in the operation check. The operation check sound may be output while outputting.

With such a configuration, it is possible to check the operation while notifying the outside of the opening of the door, thereby enhancing the convenience.

Further, a door (for example, the front door 102) that can be opened and closed is provided, the plurality of light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means, and the first light emitting means is the light emitting means when the door is opened. The operation check may be possible while the door is open, and the second light emitting means may not perform the operation while the door is open, making the operation check impossible.

With such a configuration, by closing the door to check the operation of the second light emitting means, it may be possible to prevent erroneous operations such as changing settings.

Further, the light-emitting means arranged in the area not subject to the operation check may be extinguished when the door is closed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy to understand the target area of the operation check, and to quickly perform the operation check.

Further, the operation check may be executable during setting change or setting confirmation.

With such a configuration, only the game store clerk or the like can check the operation.

In addition, a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157) is provided, and when the power is turned on with the setting key turned from off to on (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), the setting can be changed. , a part of the setting change operation can be performed with the door opened, and in the first case, the display means displays an operation check screen (for example, FIG. 27) on which the operation check can be performed. (d) and the like can be displayed, and after the setting change is completed, the operation check screen disappears in association with turning off the setting key from on, and an effect related to the game is displayed. Even if the door is closed after the display is started and the setting change is completed, the effect display is not started and the operation check screen continues when the setting key is off. It may be displayed.

Since the operation check can be executed during setting change or setting confirmation, there are cases where the door is closed without changing the setting value of the original setting value. By continuously displaying , it is possible to notify that the normal game is not possible, so there are cases where it is possible to tell the hall clerk if he forgot to change the setting or remove the setting key.

Further, the “rendering means” according to the present invention may be a display means such as the liquid crystal display device 157 or a movable body such as the shutter 163 .

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of reporting a certain error, and the certain error is at least one of a plurality of types of errors that can occur in the gaming machine. If the power is cut while the error is occurring, and the error continues when the power is turned on after the power cut, the setting key is pressed as part of the setting change operation. In a state in which the setting value cannot be changed even if the operation is performed (hereinafter referred to as a "first state"), and when the power is turned on and the error has not occurred, the setting value is changed. It includes a changeable state (hereinafter referred to as "second state") and a state in which setting values can be confirmed (hereinafter referred to as "third state"), and is part of the setting change operation. When the power is turned on in a state in which a certain operation has been performed with the setting key, the second state is entered, and when the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on, the second state is entered. When the power is turned off while the certain error is occurring and the power is turned on while the certain operation is being performed after the power is turned off, the first state is reached, The amusement machine may be characterized in that it is possible to shift to the third state when the certain error is resolved in the first state.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 20) is a gaming machine capable of reporting a certain error, and the certain error is At least one error out of a plurality of types of errors that can occur (for example, medal insertion errors 1 to 4, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow errors, RAM defects, prize winning errors, etc.), and the error occurs. If the power is cut off while the power is on, and the error continues when the power is turned on after the power cut, the setting key is operated as part of the setting change operation (for example, the setting key When the power is turned on, the setting value cannot be changed (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"; the setting cannot be changed), and the error occurs when the power is turned on. The state in which no is generated includes a state in which the setting value can be changed (hereinafter referred to as a "second state") and a state in which the setting value can be confirmed (hereinafter referred to as a "third state". ), and when the power is turned on in a state in which a certain operation has been performed with the setting key as part of the setting change operation, the second state is entered, and after the power is turned on, the or is performed, the third state is entered, the power is cut off in the state where the certain error occurs, and the certain operation is performed as part of the setting change operation after the power is cut off. If the power is turned on in this state, the first state in which the setting value cannot be changed is entered, and if the certain error is eliminated in the first state, the setting value is changed. It is possible to confirm the set value without transitioning to a state where it is possible, and after the notification of the certain error (for example, the notification of the certain error) is started, the notification that the first state is It may be a gaming machine characterized in that it is started (for example, a setting change impossible state is notified).

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, an error occurs after the operation to change the setting value is completed and the game is started, and the situation in which the operation to change the setting value is wasted is prevented. This can be avoided and workability can be improved. In addition, since the first state is notified after the notification of a certain error is started, it is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that a certain error has occurred and that the set value cannot be changed. and workability can be further improved. In addition, after the error is resolved, the setting value can be confirmed without transitioning to a state in which the setting value can be changed. It is possible to reliably confirm whether or not the set value has been changed to an incorrect value due to an error (whether or not there is a malfunction), and workability can be improved.

<Bet number warning notification>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40, bet number warning notification will be described. 37 to 40 are schematic diagrams (front views) showing main parts of the slot machine 100. FIG.

<Bet number warning/notification means, display means, status notification means>
First, an informing means capable of issuing a warning for the number of bets will be described. The slot machine 100 according to the present example includes notification means capable of issuing a bet amount warning (warning notification) when a game with a bet amount different from the recommended bet amount is played.

The slot machine 100 has display means capable of displaying as one of notification means. The display means provided in the slot machine 100 includes, for example, the liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157, the payout number display device 127, the accumulated number display device 125, the game information display device 126, etc., which have been described with reference to FIG. In this example, it is composed of a liquid crystal display device and LEDs.

When the display means is applied as the notification means, for example, the liquid crystal display device 126 can display a character string such as "Two bet game! Bet three!" Using the entire display area of the display device 126 to display an image including a character string such as "Please bet 3 coins" corresponds to an example of the bet number warning notification.

The slot machine 100 includes sound output means capable of outputting sound as one of notification means. Sound output means included in the slot machine 100 includes, for example, the speakers 272 and 277 described with reference to FIG.

When the sound output means is applied as the notification means, for example, outputting a warning sound from the speakers 272 and 277, outputting a warning sound in relation to the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 and the start lever 135, Outputting a voice such as "You are betting 2 coins. Please be careful" and "Please bet 3 coins" is an example of the bet number warning notification.

The slot machine 100 includes light emitting means capable of emitting (outputting) light as one of notification means. Light-emitting means included in the slot machine 100 include, for example, the upper lamp 142 and side lamps 144 described with reference to FIG. 148, a title panel 162, an effect button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, a start lever 135, etc., and in this example, all light emitting means are composed of LEDs.

When a light emitting means is applied as the notification means, for example, blinking the upper lamp 142 or the side lamp 144, changing the emission color of the stop buttons 137 to 139 or the start lever 135, etc. is an example of the number of bet warning notification. Applicable.

The title panel 162 of this example also functions as a state notification means provided at a position visible to the player. Although the details will be described later, the title panel 162 (status notification means) is capable of executing a first notification suggesting the first state and a second notification suggesting the second state. be.

<Bet number warning/playability>
Next, the gaming properties of the slot machine 100 of this example will be described.

The slot machine 100 according to the present example is a two-bet recommended game (first state) in which a two-bet game (first bet number) is recommended, and a three-bet game (second bet number). and a three-bet recommended game (second state) in which a game is recommended.

The first state is a normal game that shifts to the second state when a bonus (a certain internal winning combination) is internally won in a game with a two-coin bet game (first bet number). On the other hand, the second state is an AT game in which a certain internal winning combination is not won in a game based on a 3-coin bet game (second bet number), and the first state is better than the second state. is a disadvantageous state for the player.

The states shown in FIGS. 37(a) to (d), FIGS. 38(a) to (d), and FIG. (d), the state shown in FIGS. 40(a) and 40(b) is a three-coin bet recommended game (second state).

As described above, the title panel 162 of this example can execute the first notification suggesting the first state and the second notification suggesting the second state. Now, in the two-coin bet recommended game (first state) shown in FIGS. 37(a) to 39(a), the title panel 162 is turned off to execute the first notification.

On the other hand, in the three-bet recommended game (second state) shown in FIGS. 39(b) to 40(b), the second notification is executed by lighting the title panel 162 in the same notification mode as in the normal game. are doing.

In addition, the notification mode of the "first notification" and "second notification" according to the present invention is not particularly limited. The second notification may be performed by performing notification in a manner (for example, lighting the title panel 162 with a special light emission pattern).

In addition, the "status notification means" according to the present invention is not limited to the title panel 162, and includes, for example, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 described with reference to FIG. 149c, the reel backlight 148 of each reel 110-112, the effect button 192, the stop buttons 137-139, the start lever 135, etc., or the sound output means such as the speakers 277, 277. good.

<Bet number warning/Example>
Next, an example of bet number warning notification will be described.

<Notification of Bet Number Warning/Embodiment/Recommended Double Bet Game (First State)>
The states shown in FIGS. 37(a) to (d), FIGS. 38(a) to (d), and FIG. 39(a) are two-bet recommended games (first state). The state shown is a state in which a two-coin bet-recommended game (first state) is started in the slot machine 100 after initial shipment, and a bonus (a certain internal winning combination) has not been internally won (bonus non-win state). be.

This 2-coin bet recommended game (first state) is originally a state in which the player does not play the game, but the store clerk or the like shifts to the 3-coin bet recommended game (second state). If there is no AT lottery, the AT lottery will not be performed. This state is more disadvantageous to the player than the game recommended to bet on coins (second state).

In this example, turning off the title panel 162 starts the first notification suggesting that the current state is the recommended two-bet game (first state).

According to this example, the player and the game store can be notified that the first state is not the originally recommended gaming state, and that if the warning is issued in the second state, it will be disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to suggest to the store clerk, etc., and prevent disadvantageous giving.

The state shown in FIG. 37(b) is a state in which 13 medals (game media) are inserted, 3 medals are used as the number of bets for the game, and the remaining 10 medals are electronically stored (credited). .

In this example, the number of stored credits indicator 125 displays that the number of credits is 10 (in this example, numerical value display of "10").

The state shown in FIG. 37(c) is a state in which the start lever 135 has been operated (lever operation) in the triple bet game.

In this example, when a 3-bet game (game with a second bet amount) is executed in a 2-bet recommended game (first state), the bet amount warning notification (warning notification) is not executed. Therefore, the bet number warning notification is not executed here.

According to this example, when the game with the first bet number is executed in the second state, the warning notification is executed, and when the game with the second bet number is executed in the first state, Since the warning notification is not executed, the warning notification is performed only in the second state that should be originally recommended, so that the player can be suggested the correct way to hit the ball, and the second state gives a bad impression. can be prevented. Further, when a game with the second bet amount is executed in the first state, by not performing the warning notification, it is possible to make the player aware that the second state is not reached.

In addition, in the game, a specific winning combination (strong cherry in this example) is internally won, but in this example, the advance notice display is not displayed in the two-bet recommended game (first state). Therefore, here, the notice effect based on the internal winning of a specific winning combination (strong cherry) is not executed.

According to this example, it is possible to give a sense of incompatibility by not displaying an advance notice in the first state, and to make the staff of the amusement arcade or the like realize that they have forgotten to shift to the second state. In addition, since it is possible to grasp that the game is in the first state, it is possible to prompt the player, the store clerk, etc., to voluntarily shift to the second state.

The state shown in FIG. 37(d) is a state in which the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 has been performed in the triple bet game.

In this example, the specific winning combination (strong cherry) is won by performing the third stop operation while the specific winning combination (strong cherry) is internally won. When a 3-bet game (game with a second bet number) is executed in a 2-bet recommended game (first state), payout is not executed even if a specific winning combination is won. , so payout is not executed here.

The state shown in FIG. 38(a) is a state in which 2 credits appropriated from 10 credits are used as the number of bets for the game.

In this example, the number of stored credits display 125 indicates that there are 8 credits (=10-2) (in this example, the numerical value of "8" is displayed).

The state shown in FIG. 38(b) is a state in which the start lever 135 has been operated (lever operation) in the two-coin bet game.

In this example, since a two-coin bet game (game with the first bet number) is being executed in the two-coin bet recommended game (first state), the bet number warning is not notified. In addition, since the bonus (a certain internal winning combination) has not been internally won, the bonus non-winning state is maintained.

The state shown in FIG. 38(c) is a state in which the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is performed in the state of a two-coin bet game and no winning combination.

In this example, since the winning combination was not won, the payout is not executed.

The state shown in FIG. 38(d) is a state in which 2 credits appropriated from 8 credits are used as the number of bets for the game.

In this example, the number of credits display 125 indicates that there are 6 credits (=8-2) (in this example, the numerical value of "6" is displayed).

The state shown in FIG. 39(a) is a state in which the start lever 135 has been operated (lever operation) in the two-coin bet game.

In this example, since a 2-bet game (game with the first bet amount) is being executed in the 2-bet recommended game (first state), the bet amount warning notification is not executed, but a bonus (a certain internal Since the winning combination was internally won, the bonus non-win-win state is shifted to the bonus win-win state.

<Bet number warning/Example/Recommended 3-coin bet game (second state)>
The states shown in FIGS. 39(b)-(d) and FIGS. 40(a)-(b) are the three-bet recommended games (second state), and the state shown in FIG. This is a state in which the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 has been performed in the betting game, bonus win state.

In this example, since the bonus is internally won at the time of operating the lever (at the time of the internal lottery), the third stop operation of the game is used as a trigger to switch from the 2-bet recommended game (first state) to the 3-bet recommended game ( 1st state), and by lighting the title panel 162, a second notification is started suggesting that the current state is a recommended 3-bet game (second state).

According to this example, it is possible to make the store clerk or the like of the amusement arcade notice that he/she has forgotten to shift to the second state. In addition, since it is possible to grasp that the game is in the first state, it is possible to prompt the player, the store clerk, etc., to voluntarily shift to the second state.

The state shown in FIG. 39(c) is a state in which 3 credits appropriated from 8 credits are used as the number of bets for the game.

In this example, the number of stored credits display 125 indicates that the number of credits is 5 (=8-3) (in this example, the numerical value of "5" is displayed).

The state shown in FIG. 39(d) is a state in which the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 has been performed in the triple bet game.

In this example, since the notice display can be displayed in the three-coin bet recommended game (second state), here, the notice effect based on the internal winning of a specific winning combination (strong cherry) is executed. , payouts (4 in this example) corresponding to a specific winning combination (strong cherry).

The state shown in FIG. 40(a) is a state in which 2 credits appropriated from 9 credits are used as the number of bets for the game.

In this example, the number of stored credits display 125 indicates that there are 7 credits (=9-2) (in this example, the numerical value of "7" is displayed).

The state shown in FIG. 40(b) is a state in which the start lever 135 has been operated (lever operation) in the triple bet game.

In this example, when a 3-bet game (game with a second bet amount) is executed in a 3-bet recommended game (second state), a bet number warning notification (warning notification) is executed. Therefore, a bet number warning AR (in this example, display of an image including a character string such as "Two bet game! Bet three!") is executed.

As described above, according to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 20), the notification means and the control to shift to one of a plurality of types of states means (e.g., control unit 300), wherein the plurality of types of states include a first state and a second state, and the first state is a first bet number The second state is a state in which a game with a second bet number (for example, a three-bet game) is recommended, and the second state is a state in which a game with a second bet number (for example, a three-bet game) is recommended The first bet amount and the second bet amount are different numbers, and when a game with a bet amount different from the recommended bet amount is played, the notification means issues a warning regarding the bet amount (e.g. 40(b), and the informing means, when a game with the first bet amount is executed in the second state, issues the warning information. The game machine is characterized in that the notification means does not execute the warning notification when a game with the second bet amount is executed in the first state.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, when the game with the first bet number is executed in the second state, a warning is issued, and the game with the second bet number is executed in the first state. In this case, since the warning notification is not executed, the warning notification is performed only in the second state that should be originally recommended. It is possible to prevent giving a bad impression. Further, when a game with the second bet amount is executed in the first state, by not performing the warning notification, it is possible to make the player aware that the second state is not reached.

Also, the first state may be more disadvantageous to the player than the second state.

With such a configuration, the player and the player can be notified that the first state is not the originally recommended game state, and that if the warning is issued in the second state, it will be disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to make a suggestion to a store clerk or the like of the game parlor, and to prevent a disadvantage from being given.

In addition, the first state is a normal game in which the transition to the second state occurs when a certain internal winning combination (for example, a bonus) is internally won in the game with the first bet amount, and the second state is The state may be an AT game in which the certain internal winning combination is not won in the game with the second bet amount.

Further, a state notification means (for example, a title panel 162 shown in FIG. 37) provided at a position visible to the player is provided, and the state notification means provides a first display indicating the first state. A notification (for example, turning off the title panel 162) and a second notification suggesting the second state (for example, turning on the title panel 162) can be executed, and the first notification is the In relation to the internal winning of the certain internal winning combination in the first state, the notification is switched to the second notification, and the notification mode of the second notification is the same as the notification mode of the state notification means in the normal game. may

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the clerk of the amusement arcade or the like notice that he/she has forgotten to shift to the second state. In addition, since it is possible to grasp that the game is in the first state, it is possible to prompt the player, the store clerk, etc., to voluntarily shift to the second state.

In addition, a display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157) capable of displaying a plurality of types of display is provided, and the plurality of types of display can be displayed in the background (for example, the display in which the lord and the old man are in the castle as shown in FIGS. 37 and 39, etc.). background display showing how the player is sitting on the floor) and an advance notice display (for example, shown in FIG. 39(d), an advance notice effect based on the internal winning of a specific winning combination (strong cherry)), and the background display includes the above-mentioned second The first state and the second state may be the same, and the advance notice display may be displayable in the second state and not displayed in the first state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give a sense of incompatibility by not displaying an advance notice in the first state, and to make the store clerk or the like notice that he/she has forgotten to shift to the second state. In addition, since it is possible to grasp that the game is in the first state, it is possible to prompt the player, the store clerk, etc., to voluntarily shift to the second state.

A first background display may be displayed in the first state, and a second background display different from the first background display may be displayed in the second state. The background display may be a background display that can be displayed only in the first state (background display dedicated to the first state). Similarly, with respect to the notice display, the first notice display may be displayed in the first state, and the second notice display different from the first notice display may be displayed in the second state. Alternatively, the first advance notice display may be an advance notice display that can be displayed only in the first state (an advance notice display dedicated to the first state).

<Menu screen (setting screen)>
Next, the menu screen (setting screen) will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 46. FIG.

The state shown in FIG. 41(a) is a state in which the power is turned on with the front door 102 opened and the setting key provided inside the main body 101 turned on.

In this example, since the power is turned on with the setting key provided inside the main body 101 turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change/setting confirmation mode, and the menu screen (setting screen) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 . is displayed. A store clerk or the like operates the cross key 193b or the OK button 193a to select one of the setting change history, error history, system volume setting, power saving mode setting, and operation check on the menu screen (setting screen). Any item can be selected.
According to this example, it is possible to perform various other settings in addition to operations such as setting change and setting confirmation, thereby enhancing the convenience of game store clerks and the like.

<Menu screen (setting screen)/system volume setting>
Next, system volume setting will be described with reference to FIG. The system volume setting allows setting of the maximum volume that can only be set by an administrator such as an amusement store clerk, and an error sound to be output when an error (for example, opening the front door 102) occurs.

FIG. 41(b) is a diagram showing a display example when the item of system volume setting SS is temporarily selected on the menu screen. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example after an OK button 193a is pressed;

When the system volume setting SS item is provisionally selected on the menu screen and the OK button 193a is pressed, the system volume screen SSM is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 as shown in FIG. 41(c). The amusement store clerk or the like operates the cross key 193b or the OK button 193a to adjust the sound volume (administrator setting volume) output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277, etc.) on the system sound volume screen SSM. It is possible to

In this example, when the right button of the cross key 193b is pressed, the volume set by the administrator can be increased step by step in the order of volume 1 (minimum volume)→volume 2→volume 3 (maximum volume and initial value). When the left button of the cross key 193b is pressed, the volume set by the administrator can be decreased step by step in the order of volume 3 (maximum volume and initial value) → volume 2 → volume 1 (minimum volume). By pressing the OK button 193a, it is possible to set (store) the volume set by the administrator.

The sound pressures of volume 1 to 3 are not particularly limited, but for example, the sound pressure of volume 1 is 80 dB, the sound pressure of volume 2 is 90 dB, and the sound pressure of volume 3 is 100 dB. Further, it goes without saying that the setting value of the administrator setting volume is not limited to three levels. Also, although an example in which the maximum volume is set as the initial value has been shown, the minimum volume may be used, or another volume may be used.

FIG. 41D is a diagram showing a display example after the administrator setting volume is changed to volume 2 on the system volume screen SSM and the OK button 193a is pressed.

In this example, since the left button of the cross key 193b is pressed on the system volume screen SSM shown in FIG. Since the OK button 193a was pressed after changing the volume to 2, the provisionally selected volume 2 is set (stored) as the administrator setting volume.

Although not shown, an item for system light intensity setting is added to the menu screen, and light emitting means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight 148, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, production button 192, stop button 137 139, title panel 162, etc.) can be adjusted.

In this case, when the right button of the cross key 193b is pressed, the light intensity set by the administrator can be increased step by step in the order of light intensity 1 (minimum light intensity)→light intensity 2→light intensity 3 (maximum light intensity and initial value). When the left button of the cross key 193b is pressed, the light intensity set by the administrator can be decreased step by step in the order of light intensity 3 (maximum light intensity and initial value)→light intensity 2→light intensity 1 (minimum light intensity). By pressing the button 193a, it may be possible to set (determine) the amount of light set by the administrator.

The luminance of light amounts 1 to 3 is not particularly limited, but for example, the luminance of light amount 1 is "dark (duty ratio 40%)", and the luminance of light amount 2 is "medium (duty ratio 70%)". The brightness of 3 is "bright (duty ratio 100%)". Further, it goes without saying that the setting value of the administrator setting light amount is not limited to three stages. Also, although an example in which the maximum light intensity is set as the initial value has been shown, the minimum light intensity or other light intensity may be used.

<Menu screen (setting screen) / power saving mode setting off → on>
Next, power saving mode setting will be described with reference to FIG. In the power saving mode setting, it is possible to set at least one of the volume and the amount of light. Change the volume, the amount of light output from the light emitting means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, etc.), and the brightness of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) to values suitable for power saving (lower volume, stereo It is possible to change the sound to monaural sound, reduce the amount of light and brightness, change the color to a single color, switch static lighting to dynamic lighting, etc.).

In addition, the content of the power saving mode is not particularly limited, for example, after the power saving mode is turned on from off, when the non-gaming state has passed a predetermined time, it may shift to the power saving mode, or the settlement When the button is operated, it may be forcibly shifted to the power saving mode, or in a certain game state (for example, AT game or bonus game) it may be configured not to shift to the power saving mode , the power saving mode may be entered even during a game, and the volume of the sound output means, the light intensity of the light emitting means, the brightness of the display means, etc. may be limited.

FIGS. 42(a) and 42(b) are diagrams showing display examples when the power saving mode setting EM item is temporarily selected on the menu screen after returning from the system volume setting, and FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display example after an OK button 193a is pressed with the item of power saving mode setting EM provisionally selected.

When the power saving mode setting EM item is temporarily selected on the menu screen and the OK button 193a is pressed, the power saving mode setting screen EMM is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 as shown in FIG. 42(c). . A store clerk or the like can switch the power saving mode setting between ON and OFF on the power saving mode setting screen EMM by operating the cross key 193b or the OK button 193a.

FIG. 42(d) is a diagram showing a display example of a state in which the power saving mode setting is temporarily selected on the power saving mode setting screen EMM. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a state where the

In this example, since the down button of the cross key 193b is pressed on the power saving mode setting screen EMM shown in FIG. After changing from off to on and temporarily selecting power saving mode setting on, as shown in FIG. It is set (stored) as the power mode.

<Menu screen (setting screen) / power saving mode setting on → system volume setting>
FIGS. 43(b) and 43(c) are diagrams showing display examples when the system volume setting SS item is provisionally selected on the menu screen after returning from the power saving mode setting, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example after an OK button 193a is pressed with the item of system volume setting SS provisionally selected.

In this example, after setting the volume to volume 2 (a certain volume) as the system volume setting (first setting), when the power saving mode is set from off to on as the power saving mode setting (second setting) 43(d), the system volume setting (first setting) is disabled, and volume 2 (a certain volume) is set to volume 3 (initial value, maximum volume). are doing.

According to this example, when the power saving mode is set from off to on, the setting related to the volume (first setting) is disabled, so while checking the volume and light intensity set by the power saving mode, It is possible to reconfigure the volume, which increases the convenience of the amusement store clerks and the like. It is possible to prompt the work of resetting regarding.

In addition, when the power saving mode is set from off to on, the volume set by the first setting is set to the maximum volume, so it is difficult for amusement store clerks, etc., to compare the volume and light intensity set by the power saving mode. While confirming the balance of the volume, it is possible to prompt the work of resetting the volume.

<Menu screen (setting screen) / power saving mode setting off → system volume setting>
FIG. 44A is a diagram showing a display example after the administrator setting volume is changed to volume 1 on the system volume screen SSM and the OK button 193a is pressed.

In this example, since the left button of the cross key 193b is pressed on the system volume screen SSM shown in FIG. Since the OK button 193a was pressed after changing the volume to 1, the provisionally selected volume 1 is set (stored) as the administrator setting volume.

FIGS. 44(b) and 44(c) are diagrams showing display examples when the power saving mode setting EM item is temporarily selected on the menu screen after returning from the system volume setting, and FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display example after an OK button 193a is pressed with the item of power saving mode setting EM provisionally selected.

When the power saving mode setting EM item is temporarily selected on the menu screen and the OK button 193a is pressed, the power saving mode setting screen EMM is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 as shown in FIG. 44(d). . A store clerk or the like can switch the power saving mode setting between ON and OFF on the power saving mode setting screen EMM by operating the cross key 193b or the OK button 193a.

FIG. 45(a) is a diagram showing a display example of a state in which the power saving mode setting is temporarily selected on the power saving mode setting screen EMM, and FIG. 45(b) shows that the power saving mode setting is off. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a state where the

In this example, since the upper button of the cross key 193b is pressed on the power saving mode setting screen EMM shown in FIG. After changing from ON to OFF and temporarily selecting the power saving mode setting OFF, as shown in FIG. It is set (stored) as the power mode.

FIGS. 45(c) and 45(d) are diagrams showing display examples when the system volume setting SS item is provisionally selected on the menu screen after returning from the power saving mode setting. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example after an OK button 193a is pressed with the item of system volume setting SS provisionally selected.

In this example, in a state where the power saving mode is set to ON, after setting the volume to volume 1 (a certain volume) as the system volume setting (first setting), the power saving mode setting (second setting ), the system volume setting (first setting) is maintained when the power saving mode is set from on to off.

When the power saving mode is set to off, it is often not necessary to reset the volume, but according to this example, the volume setting is maintained when the power saving mode is set from on to off. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden on game store clerks and the like.

As described above, the amusement machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 20) includes setting means (for example, the main control unit 300, the liquid crystal display, a device 157, a cross key 193b, and an OK button 193a), wherein the plurality of settings includes a first setting and a second setting, the first setting being a volume (e.g. , the volume output from the speakers 272 and 277) (for example, the system volume setting shown in FIG. 41(b)), and the second setting is the setting related to the power saving mode (for example, FIG. 42(b) is the power saving mode setting shown in ), and the power saving mode is the volume and light intensity (for example, the volume output from the speakers 272 and 277, the light intensity of the light output from the light emitting means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, etc.) or the brightness of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) (for example, lower the volume and the amount of light, raise the volume and lower the amount of light, lower the volume and raise the amount of light, mute the sound output means) turn off the light emitting means, etc.), and after setting the volume to the first volume (for example, initial value) as the first setting, turn off the power saving mode as the second setting to on, the first volume is maintained, and after setting the volume as the first setting to a second volume (e.g., a volume other than the initial value), as the second setting, the The gaming machine is characterized in that the second volume is changed to a different volume (for example, initialized to maximum volume or minimum volume) when the power saving mode is set from off to on.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the power saving mode is set from off to on, the settings related to the volume (first setting) are invalidated, so the volume and light intensity set by the power saving mode It is possible to reset the volume while confirming the above, which increases the convenience of the store clerk, etc., and also allows the store clerk, etc., to adjust the balance between the volume and the amount of light set by the power saving mode. While making the confirmation, it is possible to prompt the work of resetting the volume.

Further, when the power saving mode is set from off to on as the second setting after setting the volume to the initial value as the first setting, the initial value may be maintained. The initial value may be the maximum volume (or minimum volume) of volume that can be set as the first setting.

With such a configuration, when the power saving mode is set from off to on, the volume according to the first setting is set to the maximum volume. While confirming the balance between the sound volume and the amount of light, it is possible to prompt the work of resetting the sound volume.

Further, in a state where the power saving mode is set to ON, after setting the volume to the first volume as the first setting, the power saving mode is set from ON to OFF as the second setting. the first volume may be maintained (the first setting may not be invalidated).

When the power saving mode is turned off, it is often not necessary to reset the volume. Since it is maintained, it is possible to reduce the burden on the staff of the amusement arcade.

Further, the setting by the setting means may be executable during at least one of setting change and setting confirmation.

With such a configuration, it is possible to perform various other settings in addition to operations such as setting change and setting confirmation, thereby enhancing the convenience of game store clerks and the like.

It also has a door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 20) and display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157) that can display the display related to the setting, and the setting key is turned on from off. When the power is turned on in the state (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), the setting change becomes possible, and part of the setting change operation (for example, setting values 1 to 6 are added one by one) The operation of pressing a setting switch for updating) can be executed with the door opened, and in the first case, the display means can execute at least one setting among the plurality of settings. A setting screen (for example, the menu screen shown in FIG. 41(a)) can be displayed, and after the setting change is completed (for example, after the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted and the setting value is confirmed), the setting In connection with turning the key from on to off, the setting screen disappears, an effect display (for example, demo screen display or normal effect) is started (see, for example, FIG. 36(c)), and the setting change is completed. Even if the door is closed later, the effect display is not started and the setting screen is continuously displayed while the setting key is in the OFF state (see, for example, FIG. 35(d). ).

Since various settings can be executed while changing settings or checking settings, there are cases where people forget to change the settings of the original settings and close the door. By continuously displaying , it is possible to notify that the normal game is not possible, so there are cases where it is possible to tell the hall clerk if he forgot to change the setting or remove the setting key.

In addition, when the setting key is turned on after the power is turned on (hereinafter referred to as "second case"), the setting confirmation becomes possible, and part of the setting confirmation operation (for example, the setting value can be executed with the door opened, and in the first case, the display means can execute at least one of the plurality of settings. A setting screen (for example, the menu screen shown in FIG. 41(a)) can be displayed, and after the setting confirmation is completed, the setting screen disappears in association with turning off the setting key from on, and the game is played. (for example, demo screen display or normal effect) is started (see, for example, FIG. 36(c)), and even if the door is closed after the setting confirmation is completed, the setting key In the off state, the effect display may not be started and the setting screen may be continuously displayed (see, for example, FIG. 35(d)).

Since various settings can be executed while changing settings or checking settings, there are cases where the user forgets to check the settings of the original settings and closes the door. By continuously displaying , it is possible to notify that the normal game is not possible, so there are cases where it is possible to tell the hall clerk if you forgot to check the settings or forget to remove the setting key.

Further, it may be configured such that while the door is open is notified by light or display while the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, the opening of the door is not notified by sound.

With such a configuration, setting change or setting confirmation work can be performed in a quiet environment, and the convenience of game store clerks and the like can be enhanced.

<Various notifications>
Next, various notifications that can be executed by the slot machine 100 will be described.

<Various notification/notification means (display means)>
First, before explaining various notifications, the notification means provided in the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 47(a). FIG. 47(a) is a schematic view (front view) of main parts showing the notification means of the slot machine 100. FIG.

The slot machine 100 has display means capable of displaying as one of notification means. The display means provided in the slot machine 100 includes, for example, the liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157, the payout number display device 127, the accumulated number display device 125, the game information display device 126, etc., which have been described with reference to FIG. These display means are composed of liquid crystal display devices, LEDs, segment displays and the like in this example.

<Various notification/notification means (sound output means)>
The slot machine 100 includes sound output means capable of outputting sound as one of notification means. Sound output means included in the slot machine 100 includes, for example, the speakers 272 and 277 described with reference to FIG.

<Various Notification/Notification Means (Light Emitting Means)>
The slot machine 100 includes light emitting means capable of emitting (outputting) light as one of notification means. Light-emitting means provided in the slot machine 100 include, for example, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the reel backlights 148 of the reels 110 to 112, the production button 192, the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the start lever. 135, etc., and in this example, all of these light emitting means are composed of LEDs.

The effect button 192, the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the start lever 135 also function as operating means that can be operated by the player. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, and examples of light-emitting means provided in the pachinko machine include frame lamps, effect buttons, accessories, and the like.

<Various notification / setting change / setting confirmation mode>
Next, before describing various notifications, the setting change/setting confirmation mode will be described.

The amusement machine according to the present embodiment opens the front door 102 (door body) and turns on the power in a state where a certain operation (operation from off to on) is performed by a setting key provided inside the main body 101. (or when the setting key is turned on before the specified time has elapsed after the power is turned on (before the control unit checks the on/off state of the setting key)) It is possible to shift to a changeable (setting change) state (setting change mode).

Here, changing the setting refers to changing the setting value of the gaming machine. Each time a pressing operation of the setting switch) is detected once, the currently set set values 1 to 6 are updated by adding 1, and when the set value exceeds 6, the set value returns to 1 repeatedly. It is possible to change the setting value with .

Further, in the setting change mode, when a pressing operation by the operating means (in this example, the start lever 135) is accepted, the setting value is confirmed, and when a certain operation by the setting key is released (in this example, the ON When the setting key is pulled out after the operation to turn off from is performed), the state in which the setting value can be changed (setting change mode) ends, and the state shifts to the normal game state in which normal games are possible. Note that "cancelling a certain operation" is not limited to "an operation to turn a setting key off from on" and then "to remove a setting key", but may be "an operation to turn a setting key off". good too.

It should be noted that when the operating means (setting switch) is not pressed and the operating means (start lever 135) is operated, or when the operating means (setting switch) is repeatedly pressed down, the setting value is reduced by one cycle (for example, , setting 5 → setting 6 → setting 1 → .

In the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, after the front door 102 (door body) is opened and the power is turned on, a certain operation (turning on from off) is performed by a setting key provided inside the main body 101. When it is detected, it is possible to shift to a state (setting confirmation mode) in which confirmation of setting values (setting confirmation) is possible.

Here, the setting confirmation refers to confirming the setting value of the game machine, and in this example, by pressing the operating means (setting switch), the initially set setting value (for example, setting 1), or By displaying the setting value (one of setting 1 to setting 6) set by setting change on the payout number display 127, it is possible to confirm the setting value.

Also, in the setting confirmation mode, when a certain operation by the setting key is canceled (in this example, the setting key is pulled out after an operation to turn it off from on) and the front door 102 is closed, the set value is changed. The confirmable state (setting confirmation mode) is terminated, and the normal game state is shifted to a normal game state. Note that "cancelling a certain operation" is not limited to "an operation to turn a setting key off from on" and then "to remove a setting key", but may be "an operation to turn a setting key off". good too.

In the specification of the present application, the setting change mode in which settings can be changed and the setting confirmation mode in which settings can be confirmed may be collectively referred to as the setting change/setting confirmation mode. , a setting change mode in which only setting changes are possible, a setting confirmation mode in which only setting confirmation is possible, and a setting change and setting confirmation mode are included.

<Various notification / setting change mode>
Next, various notifications in the setting change mode will be described.

FIGS. 47(b) to 49(c) are diagrams showing an example of various notifications in chronological order from the operation check and setting change in the setting change mode to the transition to the normal game.

<Various notifications / Door open → Power on with setting change → Shift to setting change mode>
In the state shown in FIG. 47(b), the store clerk or the like opens the front door 102, turns on the setting key, turns on the power, and shifts to the setting change mode. is.

When the slot machine 100 is powered on while the front door 102 (door body) is opened and a setting key provided inside the main body 101 has been operated (turned on from off) ( Alternatively, if the setting key is turned on before the specified time has elapsed after the power is turned on (before the control unit checks the on/off state of the setting key), the setting value is changed (the setting is changed). ) is possible (setting change mode).

In addition, in the slot machine 100, when the setting value is changeable and the door is open (first case), a notification sound is output to indicate that the setting value is changeable. Instead, it starts outputting a notification sound indicating that the door is open. Further, when the set value is changeable and the door is open (first case), the display including the display indicating that the set value is changeable is displayed in the first display mode. to display.

Specifically, since the state shown in FIG. 47(b) is a state in which the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, a setting change notification sound ( In this example, the opening notification sound (first sound In this example, the voice of person A saying "the door is open") is repeatedly output from speakers 272 and 277 .

According to this example, when the door is opened during the setting change, the notification sound indicating the door opening is output while the setting change notification sound is not output. A store clerk or the like in a game store can surely know that the door is open.

In addition, since this state is a state in which the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, a setting changing display (in this example, "setting change in progress") indicates that the setting value can be changed. ) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 in the first display mode (in this example, a display mode in which the character string "Setting changing" is placed in the center of the yellow background image). to display.

According to this example, when the door is opened while the settings are being changed, a notification sound indicating that the settings are being changed is not output, but a display indicating that the settings are being changed is displayed. can be reliably grasped visually.

Further, in the slot machine 100, when the set value is changeable and the door is open (first case), a part of the notification means is used to indicate that the door is open. is notified.

Specifically, since the state shown in FIG. 47(b) is a state in which the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 flash in red, A notification (open notification) indicating that the front door 102 is in an open state is performed.

According to this example, it is possible to detect that the door is open during the setting change by the light-emitting means (that the setting is being changed or that there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is being carried out). etc., can be communicated with certainty.

Note that the effect button 192 is a means that functions as an operation means for various settings and the like, and is a means that functions as a notification means that can notify, but as shown in FIG. When it functions as a means, it is an operation means whose operation is invalidated.

<Various notifications / setting change mode (door open → door closed)>
The state shown in FIG. 47(c) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state while the setting key is kept on after shifting to the setting change mode.

In the slot machine 100, when the setting value is changeable and the door is in the closed state (second case), the output of a notification sound indicating that the setting value is changeable is started. . Further, when the set value is changeable and the door is closed (second case), the display including the display indicating that the set value is changeable is displayed in the second display mode. to display.

The state shown in FIG. 47(c) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed in the setting change mode, so a setting change notification sound (in this example, " The voice of the person A saying "The setting is being changed!") is repeatedly output from the speakers 272 and 277.

As described with reference to FIGS. 47(b) and 47(c), according to this example, in the door open state during setting change, the notification sound during setting change is not output, while the door closing sound during setting change is not output. To provide a game machine having a characteristic informing means, in which a notification sound is output during setting change in the state, so that the state of door opening and door closing can be interlocked with the presence or absence of notification sound during setting change. can do. In addition, in the door open state, a notification sound indicates that the door is open while the settings are being changed (there is a possibility that the settings are being changed or that fraudulent acts are being carried out). A store clerk or the like can be reliably notified, and in the door closed state, a store clerk or the like can be reliably notified by the notification sound that the setting change has not been completed.

Further, when the slot machine 100 is in a state in which the setting value can be changed and the door body is in the closed state (second case), the setting changing display ( In this example, the display including the character string "setting is being changed" is displayed in the second display mode (in this example, the character string "setting is being changed" is placed in the upper left corner of the green background image and , is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 as a setting screen (first setting screen; display mode including the operation check setting screen) on which the operation check can be started.

Specifically, in the setting change mode of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a setting screen (first setting screen; operation check setting screen) on which the operation check can be started. The store clerk or the like operates the cross key 193 (operation means) to arbitrarily select any one of speaker check, accessory check, and effect button check on the setting screen (first setting screen). It is possible to

According to this example, in the door open state during setting change, the display including the display indicating that the setting value can be changed is displayed in the first display mode, while the door closed state during setting change is displayed. In the state, the display including the display indicating that the setting value can be changed is displayed in the second display mode different from the first display mode. It is possible to easily grasp which state it is.

In this example, in the second display mode, the character string "setting change in progress" is displayed in a smaller size than in the first display mode. is output, it is possible to reliably inform the store clerk or the like that the setting change has not been completed by the notification sound.

Items selectable in the setting change mode (first setting) are not limited to this example. operation check, operation check of the movable body to be described later using FIG. Light intensity setting of display means, power saving mode setting, history of setting change (date and time, setting value at time of setting change), history of setting confirmation (date and time, setting value at time of setting confirmation), history of errors that occurred in the past It may be a history or the like.

<Various notifications / Setting change mode (door closed) / Operation check>
As described with reference to FIG. 27 and the like, the operation check means that one of the plurality of effects provided in the slot machine 100 (one or a plurality of effects) is selected according to a predetermined operation pattern. It is the work of checking (inspecting) whether or not a certain production means is operating based on a certain operation pattern (whether there are any abnormalities) by operating based on.

The type of operation check is not particularly limited, but in this example, speaker check, accessory check, and effect button check can be executed.

The speaker check includes, for example, an operation pattern for outputting a certain sound from the sound output means, an operation pattern for changing the volume and frequency of the sound output from the sound output means, and a stop for outputting sound from the sound output means (muting). ) Based on the operation pattern, the operation pattern for outputting sound in a certain order when there are multiple sound output means, the operation pattern for outputting sound only from some sound output means when there are multiple sound output means, etc. This is the work to check whether the sound output means such as 272, 277 are operating according to the operation pattern.

The character check includes, for example, an operation pattern for lighting the LEDs that make up the light emitting means in a certain order, an operation pattern for blinking the LEDs that make up the light emitting means, an operation pattern for changing the color of the light emitting means, and a plurality of light emitting means. When there are a plurality of light emitting means, only some of the light emitting means are displayed, etc., based on the operation pattern, etc. It checks whether or not the light emitting means such as the reel backlight 148, the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the start lever 135 operate according to the operation pattern, and checks whether the movable body such as the shutter 163 operates according to the operation pattern. It is work to check.

The effect button check is based on, for example, an operation pattern for vibrating the effect button 192, an operation pattern for causing the light emitting means of the effect button 192 to emit light in a certain color, an operation pattern for blinking the light emitting means of the effect button 192 in a certain color, and the like. It is a work to check whether the effect button 192 (operating means) is operating according to the operation pattern.

In this example, after shifting to the setting change mode, if the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state while the setting key is kept on, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 will show the display shown in FIG. 47(c). An operation check setting screen like this is displayed.

On the action check setting screen of this example, speaker check, accessory check, and effect button check are displayed, and any action check item can be temporarily selected by operating the cross key 193 (operation means). When the effect button 192 is pressed with one of the operation checks provisionally selected, the corresponding operation check is started.

<Various notifications/setting change mode (door closed)/speaker check start>
The state shown in FIG. 47(d) is a state in which the effect button 192 is pressed with the speaker check item provisionally selected on the operation check setting screen, and the speaker check is executed.

In the speaker check of this example, first, out of the speakers 272 and 277, the upper speaker arranged in the upper part of the main body 101 outputs a voice saying "This is the upper speaker". The lower left speaker arranged on the lower left side of the main body 101 outputs a voice saying "This is the lower left speaker". A speaker (sound output means) operation check is performed by outputting a voice saying "This is a speaker." Also, during the speaker check, the output of the setting change notification sound (in this example, the sound "setting is being changed!") is interrupted.

According to this example, in the door closed state, the display mode (second display mode) including the setting screen for starting the operation check is displayed to indicate that the setting value can be changed. In the closed state, the performance means can be reliably checked for operation.

<Various notifications / Setting change mode (door closed) / End of speaker check>
The state shown in FIG. 47(e) is the state where the speaker check executed in FIG. 47(d) is completed.

In this example, since the speaker check is completed, the setting change notification sound (in this example, the sound "The setting is being changed!"), which was interrupted during the speaker check, is output from the speakers 272 and 277.

<Various notifications / Setting change mode (front door closed) / Production button check start>
The state shown in FIG. 47(f) is a state in which the effect button check is temporarily selected on the operation check setting screen, and the state shown in FIG. 48(a) is a state in which the effect button check is temporarily selected and the effect button 192 is pressed and the effect button check is executed.

In the effect button check of this example, the operation check of the effect button 192 (operating means) is executed by vibrating the effect button 192 for a predetermined time. Also, unlike the speaker check, the output of the setting change notification sound (in this example, the sound "The setting is being changed!") continues to be output during the effect button check.

According to this example, in the door closed state, the display mode (second display mode) including the setting screen for starting the operation check is displayed to indicate that the setting value can be changed. In the closed state, the performance means can be reliably checked for operation.

In addition, since the production button (operation means) also functions as a notification means for notifying that the door is open, it is preferable that the operation can be checked only when the door is closed. You can be sure of checking.

The operation pattern of the effect button check is not limited to vibration, and instead of (or in addition to) the effect button 192 may be lit or blinked in a predetermined pattern.

<Various notifications / Setting change mode (door closed) / Production button check finished>
The state shown in FIG. 48(b) is a state in which the effect button check executed in FIG. 48(a) is finished.

In this example, since the effect button check is completed, the vibration of the effect button 192 is stopped, while the setting change notification sound (in this example, the sound "The setting is being changed!") continues to be output.

<Various notifications / setting change mode (door closed → door open)>
The state shown in FIG. 48(c) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the closed state to the open state while the setting key is kept on after shifting to the setting change mode.

This state is a state in which the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, so a setting change notification sound (in this example, "setting is being changed") indicates that the setting value can be changed. Without starting the output of the door, the opening notification sound (the first sound. In this example, the sound “the door is open”) indicating that the door is open is output from the speakers 272 and 277. While outputting, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 flash in red to notify that the front door 102 is open (open notification).

Note that the effect button 192 is a means that functions as an operation means in various settings and the like, and is a means that functions as a notification means that can be notified. operation as is disabled.

Further, since the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, the display including the setting changing display (in this example, the display of the character string "setting changing") is changed to the first display mode. (In this example, a display mode in which a character string "setting change in progress" is arranged in the center of a yellow background image) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 .

<Various notifications/setting change mode (door open)/setting change operation>
The state shown in FIG. 48(d) is a state in which the setting value is confirmed and the setting change is completed.

In this example, while the set value is displayed on the payout number display 127, each time the operating means (setting switch) is pressed once, the currently set set values 1 to 6 are incremented by 1. After the setting value is changed from setting 1 to setting 6, the operation means (in this example, the start lever 135) has received a pressing operation, so the setting value is confirmed as setting 6, and the payout number display 127 , the number "06" is displayed.

In addition, in the same state, since the setting value is confirmed and the setting change is completed, the setting change in progress display is ended, and the setting change completion display (in this example, , a screen in which a character string “setting change completed” is placed in the center of a yellow background image) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 .

In this example, since the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, the output of the open notification sound ("the door is open") is continued, but the operation means (this In the example, when a pressing operation by the start lever 135) is received, the output of the open notification sound is interrupted, and a setting change completion notification sound (for example, "setting change completed”) is output from the speakers 272 and 277, the output of the opening notification sound may be restarted.

<Various notifications / Setting change mode (door open) / End of setting change>
The state shown in FIG. 48(e) is a state in which a certain operation by the setting key is canceled (the setting key is pulled out after an operation to turn the setting key from on to off is performed) and the setting change mode is terminated.

In this state, the setting change mode (a state in which setting values can be changed) is terminated, and a normal game state in which a normal game is possible is entered. Display in the display area. Since the front door 102 is in the open state, the output of the open notification sound (the voice saying "the door is open") continues.

<Various notifications / normal game state (door open → door closed)>
The state shown in FIG. 48(f) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state after the setting change mode is terminated and the normal game state is entered.

In this state, the front door 102 is neither in the open state nor in the setting change mode. Therefore, the setting change indication on the liquid crystal display device 157 is not displayed, and the opening notification sound and the setting change notification sound are output from the speakers 272 and 277. Also, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are not notified of opening.

<Various notifications / normal game state (door closed → door open)>
The state shown in FIG. 49(a) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the closed state to the open state in the normal game state.

When the setting value is changeable and the door is open (first case), the slot machine 100 outputs a notification sound indicating that the door is open to the first sound (this example Then, when the door changes from the closed state to the open state after the state in which the set value can be changed ends, the door opens. A second sound (in this example, the voice of person B saying "The door is open!") is output to indicate the state.

In the state shown in FIG. 49(a), the setting change mode (the state in which the set value can be changed) is terminated, and the front door 102 is opened in the normal game state. The speaker 272, 277 outputs an opening notification sound (second sound. In this example, the voice of the person B saying "The door is open!"), and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 , the production button 192 is flashed in red to notify that the front door 102 is open (open notification).

According to this example, when the door changes from the closed state to the open state after the state in which the setting value can be changed ends, the second sound different from the first sound output in the state in which the setting value can be changed is output. Since the sound of is output, it is possible to make the store clerk or the like of the amusement arcade recognize again that the setting change is completed by changing the output sound. In addition, when the door is in the closed state, it is possible to check the operation, etc., so there is a risk of forgetting whether or not the setting has been changed when the operation check, etc. is executed. It is possible to make the store clerk or the like of the game store recognize again that the game has been completed.

<Various notifications / normal game state (door open → door closed → medal inserted)>
The state shown in FIG. 49(b) is the state in which the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state in the normal game state, and the state shown in FIG. 49(c) is the state where the front door 102 is closed and the medal is put in.

In this example, in the normal game state, the front door 102 is closed and medals are inserted. Therefore, the demo screen is terminated, the normal game screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and the normal game is started. is starting.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and pachinko machine shown in FIG. 20) includes setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values, A door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 20) and notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157, a payout number display 127, a storage number display 125, speakers 272, 277, an upper lamp 142, a side lamp 144 , reel backlight 148, effect button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), and a certain operation (for example, operation from OFF to ON) is performed by a setting key. When the power is turned on in a state where the setting value can be changed (for example, setting change mode), the notification means is means including sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277). , the sound output means operates when the set value is changeable and the door is open (hereinafter referred to as "first case". For example, the setting change mode shown in FIG. 47(b) means for not outputting a notification sound indicating that the set value is changeable when the front door 102 is open in the first case), and the sound output means is the first case When the door body changes to the open state or the closed state (hereinafter referred to as "second case", for example, when the front door 102 is closed in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 47(c)) , to start outputting a notification sound indicating that the setting value can be changed (for example, the voice of Person A saying "The setting is being changed!" shown in FIG. It is a game machine characterized in that it is a means.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, in the door open state during the setting change, the notification sound during the setting change is not output, while in the door closed state during the setting change, the notification sound during the setting change is output. Therefore, it is possible to interlock the state of door opening and door closing with the presence or absence of a notification sound during setting change, and it is possible to provide a game machine having a characteristic notification means. In addition, in the door open state, a notification sound indicates that the door is open while the settings are being changed (there is a possibility that the settings are being changed or that fraudulent acts are being carried out). A store clerk or the like can be reliably notified, and in the door closed state, a store clerk or the like can be reliably notified by the notification sound that the setting change has not been completed.

Further, in the first case, the sound output means outputs a notification sound indicating that the door is in an open state (for example, a person A saying "The door is open" shown in FIG. 47(b). It may be a means for executing the output of the voice of the

With such a configuration, when the door is opened while the setting is being changed, the notification sound indicating that the door is open is output while the notification sound indicating that the setting is being changed is not output. Therefore, the game store clerk or the like can surely know that the door is open.

Further, the notification means is means including a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and the display means, in the first case, displays ( For example, a display of a character string "setting being changed"), and the display means, in the second case, displays a display indicating that the setting value is changeable. It may be a means for displaying an indication including.

With such a configuration, when the door is opened while the settings are being changed, a notification sound indicating that the settings are being changed is not output, but a display indicating that the settings are being changed is displayed. It is possible to grasp certain things visually.

Further, in the first case, the display means displays a display indicating that the setting value is changeable in a first display mode (for example, a yellow background image shown in FIG. 47(b)). display mode in which a character string "setting is being changed" is arranged in the center, and the display means displays that the setting value is changeable in the second case. is displayed in a second display mode (for example, a setting screen (operation check setting a display mode including a screen), wherein the first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes, and a certain presentation capable of executing an action based on a certain action pattern Means (e.g., speaker, accessory (movable body), effect button) are provided, and the certain effect means is located at a position where the action can be checked (hereinafter referred to as "action check") from the front of the game machine. and the second display mode may be a display mode including a setting screen on which the operation check can be started.

With such a configuration, in the door open state during setting change, the display including the display indicating that the setting value can be changed is displayed in the first display mode, while the setting change is being performed. In the door closed state, the display including the display indicating that the setting value can be changed is displayed in the second display mode different from the first display mode. It is possible to easily grasp in which state of closure it is. In addition, in the door closed state, a display mode (second display mode) including a setting screen capable of starting an operation check is displayed to indicate that the setting value can be changed. Therefore, in the door closed state, To surely perform an operation check of a performance means.

Further, at least part of the certain effect means (for example, a effect button) functions as the notifying means capable of notifying that the door body is in the open state in the first case. may

With such a configuration, it is preferable that the means that also functions as the notification means for notifying the door opening is capable of checking the operation only in the closed state of the door. can be done.

In addition, in the first case, the sound output means outputs a notification sound indicating that the door is in an open state, such as a first sound (for example, "Door is open" shown in FIG. 47(b). The sound output means is means for outputting by the voice of the person A saying, Means for outputting a notification sound indicating that the door is in an open state as a second sound (for example, voice of person B saying "The door is open!" shown in FIG. 49(a)) and the first sound and the second sound may be different sounds.

With such a configuration, when the door changes from the closed state to the open state after the state in which the setting value can be changed ends, the sound differs from the first sound output in the state in which the setting value can be changed. Since the second sound is output, it is possible to make the store clerk or the like of the amusement arcade recognize again that the setting change is completed by changing the output sound. In addition, when the door is in the closed state, it is possible to check the operation, etc., so there is a risk of forgetting whether or not the setting has been changed when the operation check, etc. is executed. It is possible to make the store clerk or the like of the game store recognize again that the game has been completed.

<Various notification / setting confirmation mode>
Next, various notifications in the setting confirmation mode will be described. FIGS. 49(b) to 51(f) are diagrams showing an example of various notifications in chronological order from the execution of operation check and setting confirmation in the setting confirmation mode to the transition to the normal game.

<Various notifications / door open → power on>
The state shown in FIG. 49(d) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened and the power is turned on.

In this state, since the front door 102 is open, the speaker 272 outputs an open notification sound (in this example, the sound "the door is open") indicating that the door is open. , 277, and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 blink in red to notify that the front door 102 is open (open notification). In addition, in this example, the effect button 192 is configured not to notify the opening.

<Transition to various notification/setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 49(e) is a state in which the setting key is turned on after the power is turned on, and the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode.

After opening the front door 102 (door body) of the slot machine 100 and turning on the power, when a certain operation (turning on from off) is performed by a setting key provided inside the main body 101, , it is possible to shift to a state (setting confirmation mode) in which setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation).

Further, in the slot machine 100, when the setting value is in a state in which the setting value can be confirmed and the door is in an open state (first case), a notification sound is output to indicate that the setting value is in a state in which the setting value can be confirmed. Instead, it starts outputting a notification sound indicating that the door is open. In addition, when the setting value is in a state in which the setting value can be confirmed and the door is in the open state (first case), a display including a display indicating that the setting value is in a state in which the setting value can be confirmed is displayed in the third display mode. to display.

The state shown in FIG. 49(e) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened in the setting confirmation mode, so that the setting confirmation alarm sound (in this example, the 50 (c), without starting to output the sound "The setting is being checked!" The voice of the person A saying "I'm opening it") is repeatedly output from the speakers 272 and 277.

According to this example, when the door is opened during setting confirmation, the notification sound indicating that the door is open is output while the notification sound indicating that the setting is being confirmed is not output. A store clerk or the like in a game store can surely know that the door is open.

In addition, the display including the setting confirmation display indicating that the setting value can be confirmed (in this example, the display of the character string "setting confirmation in progress") is changed to the third display mode (in this example, gray color). is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 in a display mode in which a character string "confirming setting" is arranged in the upper left corner of the background image of .

According to this example, when the door is opened while the settings are being checked, the notification sound indicating that the settings are being checked is not output, but a display indicating that the settings are being checked is displayed. can be reliably grasped visually.

In addition, in the slot machine 100, when the setting value can be confirmed and the door is in the open state (first case), a part of the notification means is used to indicate that the door is in the open state. is notified.

The state shown in FIG. 49(e) is a state in which the front door 102 is open in the setting confirmation mode, so the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 blink in red, indicating that the front door 102 is open. A notification (open notification) indicating is performed.

According to this example, the fact that the door is open during setting confirmation (that the setting is being confirmed or that there is a possibility that a fraudulent act, etc. etc., can be communicated with certainty.

In addition, in the setting confirmation mode, the effect button 192 is configured not to notify the opening. Button check) is possible, and the effect button 192 can also be operated as an operating means.

In addition, the slot machine 100 is in a state where the setting value can be confirmed and the door is in an open state (first case), or when the setting value is in a state where the setting value can be confirmed and the door is closed from the open state. In either case of the state change (second case), a setting checking display indicating that the setting value can be checked (in this example, a character string "setting checking" is displayed) is displayed in the third display mode (in this example, a character string "Checking settings" is placed in the upper left of the gray background image, and a setting screen (second setting screen) that allows various settings displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

Specifically, in the setting confirmation mode of this example, a setting screen (second setting screen) on which various settings can be made is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 . A store clerk or the like operates the cross key 193 (operation means) to display volume setting, setting change history (date and time, set value at the time of setting change, etc.), error message, etc. on the setting screen (second setting screen). It is possible to arbitrarily select either the history (type of error that occurred in the past, the date and time of occurrence, etc.) or the time setting.

According to this example, since various settings can be made even when the door is open during setting confirmation, there is no need to temporarily close the door. Work efficiency can be improved.

Note that items (second settings) that can be selected in the setting confirmation mode are not limited to this example. operation check, operation check of a movable body, which will be described later with reference to FIG. , history of setting confirmation (date and time, setting value at the time of setting confirmation, etc.), operation check, and the like.

<Various notifications / setting confirmation mode (door open) / volume setting>
The state shown in FIG. 49(f) is a state in which the effect button 192 is pressed with the volume setting item provisionally selected on the setting screen (second setting screen), and the volume setting screen is displayed. The state shown in FIG. 50(a) is a state in which an operation to raise the volume by one step has been performed in the volume setting.

In the volume setting of this example, it is possible to adjust the volume of sound output from sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277 . When the right button of the cross key 193 (operation means) is pressed once while the volume setting screen shown in FIG. ) is increased by one step, and a volume meter indicating the adjusted volume level (level 4 in this example) is displayed as shown in FIG. 50(a).

In this example, the output of the open notification sound ("the door is open") continues even during the volume setting, but since the volume has been adjusted from level 3 to level 4, The opening notification sound is output from the speakers 272 and 277 at the adjusted level 4 volume.

Also, although illustration is omitted, when the left button of the cross key 193 (operation means) is pressed once while the volume setting screen shown in FIG. The volume (eg, level 3) is lowered by one step, and a volume meter indicating the adjusted volume level (eg, level 2) is displayed.

<Various notifications / Setting confirmation mode (door open) / End of volume setting>
The state shown in FIG. 50(b) is a state in which the production button 192 is pressed on the volume setting screen and the volume setting is completed.

In the same state, the volume is determined by pressing the effect button 192, and the volume setting is completed. It continues to output the voice "I'm opening it").

<Various notifications / setting confirmation mode (door open → door closed)>
The state shown in FIG. 50(c) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state while the setting key is kept on after shifting to the setting confirmation mode.

In the slot machine 100, when the setting value is in a state in which the setting value can be confirmed and the door changes from the open state to the closed state (second case), a notification sound indicating that the setting value is in the state in which the setting value can be confirmed. to start outputting In addition, when the setting value can be confirmed and the door changes from the open state to the closed state (second case), when the setting value can be confirmed and the door is open In the same manner as in the first case, a display including a display indicating that the set value is in a confirmable state is displayed in the third display mode.

The state shown in FIG. 50(c) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed in the setting confirmation mode, so a setting confirmation notification sound (in this example, " Setting is being confirmed!”) is repeatedly output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

As described with reference to FIGS. 49(e) and 50(c), according to this example, in the door open state during setting confirmation, the notification sound during setting confirmation is not output. In the door closed state, a notification sound is output during setting confirmation, so that the state of door opening and door closing can be interlocked with the presence or absence of notification sound during setting confirmation, and the game machine has a characteristic notification means. can be provided. In addition, in the door open state, a notification sound indicates that the door is open while the settings are being checked (that the settings are being checked and that there is a possibility that fraudulent acts are being carried out). A store clerk or the like can be surely notified, and in the door closed state, a store clerk or the like of the game parlor can be surely notified by the notification sound that the setting confirmation is not completed.

In addition, since this state is a state in which the front door 102 is closed in the setting confirmation mode, a setting confirmation display ("setting confirmation in progress" in this example) indicates that the setting value can be confirmed. display of the character string "Confirming settings") is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 in a third display mode (in this example, a display mode in which the character string "Confirming settings" is arranged on the upper left of the gray background image). to display.

According to this example, when the door is closed while the settings are being checked, a notification sound indicating that the settings are being checked is output, and a display indicating that the settings are being checked is displayed. can be reliably grasped visually.

<Various notifications/Setting confirmation mode (door closed)/Error history display>
In the state shown in FIG. 50(d), the effect button 192 is pressed with the error history item provisionally selected on the setting screen (second setting screen), and in the state shown in FIG. This is the state in which the history display is displayed.

In the error history display of this example, it is possible to display history information indicating the past history of the gaming machine (in this example, the history of past errors that occurred in the slot machine 100). In the example shown in FIG. 50(e), it is confirmed by the error history display that a hopper error occurred at 10:38 on September 15th and a selector error occurred at 23:45 on September 22nd. is possible.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 50(d) and 50(e) are both in the setting confirmation mode, the setting confirmation sound (in this example, "setting Checking!” continues to be output.

<Various notifications/setting confirmation mode (front door is open)/end of error history display>
The state shown in FIG. 50(f) is a state in which the effect button 192 is pressed in the error history display and the error history display is terminated.

In the same state, since the error history display is terminated by pressing the effect button 192, the error history display is terminated and the setting screen (second setting screen) is returned to. , the output of the setting confirmation notification sound (in this example, the sound “Setting confirmation is in progress!”) is continued.

<Various notifications / setting confirmation mode (door closed → door open)>
The state shown in FIG. 51(a) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the closed state to the open state in the setting confirmation mode.

In this state, since the front door 102 is open in the setting confirmation mode, the opening notification sound (first sound) indicating that the door is open. "I am here") is repeatedly output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 flash in red to notify that the front door 102 is open (open notification).

<Various notifications / setting confirmation mode (door open) / end of setting confirmation>
The state shown in FIG. 51(b) is a state in which a certain operation by the setting key is canceled (the setting key is pulled out after an operation to turn the setting key from on to off is performed), and the setting confirmation mode is finished.

In the same state, the setting confirmation mode (the state where the setting value can be confirmed) has ended, and since it has moved to the normal game state where normal games can be played, the setting screen (second setting screen) is finished and the demo screen is displayed. It is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 . Since the front door 102 is in the open state, the output of the open notification sound (the voice saying "the door is open") continues.

<Various notifications / normal game state (door open → door closed)>
The state shown in FIG. 51(c) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state after the setting confirmation mode is terminated and the normal game state is entered.

In this state, the front door 102 is not in the open state and the setting confirmation mode is not set. Therefore, the display indicating that the setting is being confirmed by the liquid crystal display device 157 is not displayed, and the opening notification sound and the setting confirmation notification sound are output from the speakers 272 and 277. Neither does the upper lamp 142 or the side lamp 144 give an opening notification.

<Various notifications / normal game state (door closed → door open)>
The state shown in FIG. 51(d) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the closed state to the open state in the normal game state.

When the setting value can be confirmed and the door is in the open state (first case), the slot machine 100 outputs a notification sound indicating that the door is in the open state to the first sound (this example , the door is open), and when the door changes from the closed state to the open state after the state in which the set value can be confirmed is completed, the door is in the open state. A second sound (in this example, the sound "The door is open!") is output as a notification sound indicating that.

In the state shown in FIG. 51(d), the setting confirmation mode (the state in which the set value can be confirmed) is completed, and the front door 102 is opened in the normal game state. The opening notification sound (second sound. In this example, the voice of person B saying “The door is open!”) is repeatedly output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 blinks in red to notify that the front door 102 is open (open notification).

According to this example, when the door body changes from the closed state to the open state after the state in which the set value can be confirmed ends, the second sound different from the first sound output in the state in which the set value can be confirmed Since the sound of is output, it is possible to make the store clerk or the like recognize again that the setting confirmation is completed by changing the output sound. Also, when various settings are made, there is a risk of forgetting whether or not the settings have been confirmed, but the second sound makes the store clerk or the like recognize again that the setting confirmation has been completed. can be done.

<Various notifications / normal game state (door open → door closed → medal inserted)>
The state shown in FIG. 51(e) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state in the normal game state, and the state shown in FIG. is put in.

In this example, in the normal game state, the front door 102 is closed and medals are inserted. Therefore, the demo screen is terminated, the normal game screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and the normal game is started. is starting.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and pachinko machine shown in FIG. 20) includes setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values, A door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 20) and notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157, a payout number display 127, a storage number display 125, speakers 272, 277, an upper lamp 142, a side lamp 144 , reel backlight 148, effect button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), and a certain operation (for example, turning from off to on) by a setting key after turning on the power operation) is performed, the setting value can be confirmed (for example, setting confirmation mode), and the notification means is means including sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277), When the setting value can be confirmed and the door body is in an open state (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), for example, in the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. (when the front door 102 is open), the sound output means does not output a notification sound indicating that the set value is in a confirmable state, and the sound output means is the first case and When the door body changes from the open state to the closed state (hereinafter referred to as "second case", for example, when the front door 102 is closed in the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 50(c)), Start (or can start) outputting a notification sound indicating that the setting value can be confirmed (for example, the voice of Person A saying "Setting confirmation is in progress!" shown in FIG. 50(c)) ) means.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, in the door open state during setting confirmation, the notification sound during setting confirmation is not output, while in the door closed state during setting confirmation, the notification sound during setting confirmation is output. Therefore, it is possible to interlock the state of the door opening and closing with the presence or absence of the notification sound during setting confirmation, and it is possible to provide a game machine having a characteristic notification means. In addition, in the door open state, a notification sound indicates that the door is open while the settings are being checked (that the settings are being checked and that there is a possibility that fraudulent acts are being carried out). A store clerk or the like can be surely notified, and in the door closed state, a store clerk or the like of the game parlor can be surely notified by the notification sound that the setting confirmation is not completed.

Further, in the first case, the sound output means outputs a notification sound indicating that the door is in an open state (for example, a person A saying "the door is open" shown in FIG. 49(e)). It may be a means for executing the output of the voice of the

With such a configuration, when the door is opened while the setting is being changed, the notification sound indicating that the door is open is output while the notification sound indicating that the setting is being changed is not output. Therefore, the game store clerk or the like can surely know that the door is open.

Further, the notification means is means including a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and the display means, in the first case, displays ( For example, display of a character string "confirming setting"), and the display means, in the second case, displays a display indicating that the setting value can be confirmed. It may be a means for displaying an indication including.

With such a configuration, when the door is opened to confirm the settings, a notification sound indicating that the settings are being confirmed is not output, but a display indicating that the settings are being confirmed is displayed. can be reliably grasped visually.

Further, in the first case, the display means displays a display indicating that the setting value can be checked in a third display mode (for example, a gray background image with a message "Checking setting" displayed on the upper left). display mode in which a character string is arranged), and in the second case, the display means displays in the third display mode a display indicating that the set value is in a confirmable state. The third display mode may be a display mode including a setting screen on which various settings are possible.

With such a configuration, various settings can be made even when the door is open during setting confirmation, so that there is no need to temporarily close the door. performance and work efficiency.

In addition, the display means displays when the setting value is changeable and the door body is in the closed state (hereinafter referred to as "third case". For example, the setting change mode shown in FIG. when the front door 102 is closed), the display indicating that the setting value can be changed is displayed in a second display mode (for example, the upper left of the green background image shown in FIG. 47(c) A display mode including a setting screen (operation check setting screen) on which an operation check can be started (operation check setting screen) while arranging a character string "setting change in progress" in the corner, and an operation based on a certain operation pattern is displayed. Execution means (for example, speakers, accessories (movable bodies), effect buttons) is provided, and the certain effect means checks the action from the front of the game machine (hereinafter referred to as "action check"). ), the second display mode is a display mode including a setting screen on which the operation check can be started, and the setting screen in the third case is set Possible items (for example, speaker check, accessory check, operation check such as effect button check), and items that can be set on the setting screen in the first case or the second case (for example, volume setting, setting change history, error history, time setting, power saving mode setting) may be different.

With such a configuration, the items that can be set in setting change and the items that can be set in setting confirmation can be separately provided, so that the work efficiency and convenience of game store clerks and the like can be improved.

Further, the item that can be set on the setting screen in the third case may be the operation check.

With such a configuration, since the operation check can be performed in the setting change which is performed less frequently than the setting confirmation, the number of times the operation check is performed does not increase more than necessary, and the work efficiency of the amusement store clerk or the like is improved. can increase

In addition, the items that can be set on the setting screen in the first case or the second case include settings that are initialized when the setting value is changed (for example, volume setting, power saving mode setting) may be included.

With such a configuration, settings can be made whether the door is open or closed during setting confirmation. This eliminates the need to temporarily close the door, thus improving the convenience and work efficiency of game store clerks and the like.

In addition, in the first case, the sound output means outputs a notification sound indicating that the door is open (for example, the first sound shown in FIG. 49(e), "The door is open. The sound output means is means for outputting by the voice of the person A saying "I'm sorry", and the sound output means outputs when the door body changes from the closed state to the open state after the state in which the set value can be confirmed has ended. 51(d), a notification sound indicating that the door is open is output as a second sound (for example, the voice of Person B saying "The door is open!"). and the first sound and the second sound may be different sounds.

With such a configuration, when the door changes from the closed state to the open state after the state in which the setting value can be confirmed ends, the sound differs from the first sound output in the state in which the setting value can be confirmed. Since the second sound is output, the change in the output sound makes it possible for the store clerk or the like to recognize again that the setting confirmation has been completed. Also, when various settings are made, there is a risk of forgetting whether or not the settings have been confirmed, but the second sound makes the store clerk or the like recognize again that the setting confirmation has been completed. can be done.

<Various notification/variation of release notification sound>
Next, a modified example of the opening notification sound will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 52(a) to 52(e) are diagrams showing an example of various notifications in chronological order from the end of the setting change in the setting change mode to the transition to the normal game state (demonstration screen).

The state shown in FIG. 52(a) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened, the power is turned on in a state where the setting key is turned on from off, and the setting change mode is entered. It is the same as the state described using b).

In this state, since the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, a setting change notification sound (for example, a voice saying "setting is being changed!") is output to indicate that the setting value can be changed. without starting the door, the opening notification sound (first sound) indicating that the door is open. ) are output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

The open notification sound in this example is a pattern sound (repeated sound) in which a sound (a certain sound) saying "the door is open" is repeatedly output, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a certain Any sound pattern is acceptable as long as the sound is output repeatedly. Please →…→ Please close the door.” voice) is also acceptable. Also, it may be a melody or a piece of music, or a combination of voice and these, for example, a sound composed of "Please close the door → (melody) → please close the door → (melody) ...". good too.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 52(b) is a state in which the setting value is determined and the setting change is completed, and is the same as the state described using FIG. 48(d).

In this state, since the setting value has been confirmed and the setting change has been completed, the setting change display is ended, and the setting change completion display (in this example, yellow ) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and since the front door 102 is open, an open notification sound (“the door is It is open → the door is open → … → the door is open”) output is continued.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 52(c) is a state in which a certain operation by the setting key is canceled (the setting key is pulled out after an operation to turn the setting key from on to off is performed) and the setting change mode is terminated. , is the same as the state described with reference to FIG.

The slot machine 100 is configured to output a certain sound from the beginning when a certain state (either a state in which the set value can be changed or a state in which the set value can be confirmed) ends. there is

In the state shown in FIG. 52(c), the setting change mode (the state in which the setting values can be changed) is terminated, and the normal game is possible, so the setting change completion display is terminated, and the demo screen is displayed. is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and an open notification sound (repeated sound of "the door is open → the door is open → ... → the door is open") is output from the beginning. .

Here, "output the open notification sound (repeated sound of ``The door is open → The door is open … → The door is open'') from the beginning" means "The door is open. While outputting the voice "The door is open", for example, if the setting change mode (the state where the setting value can be changed) ends immediately after By restarting the open notification sound, it is possible to output the voice (some sound) "The door is open" from the beginning without outputting the remaining voice "I am doing" that has not been output. means.

According to this example, by outputting (restarting) a certain sound from the beginning, a certain state (either a state in which the setting value can be changed or a state in which the setting value can be confirmed) It is possible to grasp that the game has ended, and the convenience of the store clerk or the like can be improved.

It should be noted that the restart of a certain sound may be performed in any manner as long as the timing at which setting change or setting confirmation is completed can be reliably notified by sound. Therefore, for example, a certain sound may be played from the middle. may Also, the sound output at the timing when the setting change or setting confirmation is completed (for example, the sound of “to” of “door”) will be changed to the sound (for example, “open”) after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). You may restart from the voice "ka").

The state shown in FIG. 52(d) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state after the setting change mode is terminated and the normal game state is entered. Same as described.

In this state, the front door 102 is neither in the open state nor in the setting change mode. Therefore, the setting change indication on the liquid crystal display device 157 is not displayed, and the opening notification sound and the setting change notification sound are output from the speakers 272 and 277. Also, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are not notified of opening.

The state shown in FIG. 52(e) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the closed state to the open state in the normal game state, and is the same as the state described with reference to FIG. 49(a).

When the slot machine 100 is in a certain state (either a state in which the set value can be changed or a state in which the set value can be confirmed) and the door is open (first case), the door The first sound indicates that the body is in an open state (in this example, the repeated sound of "the door is open → the door is open → ... → the door is open") , and when the door changes from the closed state to the open state after a certain state (either the state where the set value can be changed or the state where the set value can be confirmed) ends, the open notification The sound is output as a second sound (in this example, the voice saying "The door is open!").

In the state shown in FIG. 52(e), the setting change mode (the state in which the set value can be changed) is terminated, and the front door 102 is opened in the normal game state, so that the door body is in the open state. The opening notification sound (second sound. In this example, the sound “The door is open!”) is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 are turned red. and flashes to notify that the front door 102 is open (open notification).

According to this example, when the door changes from the closed state to the open state after a certain state (either the state in which the set value can be changed or the state in which the set value can be confirmed) is completed, In order to output a second sound different from the first sound to be output during a certain state, the change in the output sound makes the store clerk or the like recognize again that the certain state has been completed. can be made In addition, when executing various settings, there is a risk of forgetting whether settings have been changed or confirmed. can be made to recognize again.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and pachinko machine shown in FIG. 20) includes setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values, A door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 20) and notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157, a payout number display 127, a storage number display 125, speakers 272, 277, an upper lamp 142, a side lamp 144 , reel backlight 148, effect button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), and a certain operation (for example, operation from OFF to ON) is performed by a setting key. When the power is turned on in a state where the setting value can be changed (for example, setting change mode), after the power is turned on, the certain operation by the setting key (for example, switching from OFF to ON). operation) is performed, the setting value can be confirmed (for example, setting confirmation mode), the notification means is means including sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277), and the The sound output means outputs a certain state when the door body is open (hereinafter referred to as "first case"). when the door is open), start outputting an open notification sound indicating that the door is open (for example, the voice of person A saying “the door is open” shown in FIG. 52(a)). means (or means that can be started), the certain state is either a state in which the set value can be changed or a state in which the set value can be confirmed, and the opening notification sound is , a certain sound (for example, "The door is open") is output with a pattern of sound (for example, "Please close the door → Please close the door → ... → Please close the door"). and the sound output means outputs the certain sound from the beginning (or It is a game machine characterized in that it is a means that can output.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, by outputting (restarting) a certain sound from the beginning, a certain state (a state in which the setting value can be changed, or a state in which the setting value can be confirmed) It is possible to grasp that any state) has ended, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the store clerk or the like.

Further, the notification means is means including display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and the sound output means is a notification sound (for example, means for not outputting a voice saying "Settings are being checked!" (For example, a display of a character string "changing settings" or a display of a character string "confirming settings") may be used.

With such a configuration, when the door is opened in a certain state, a notification sound indicating the certain state is not output, but a display indicating the certain state is provided. is in a certain state (either a state in which the setting value can be changed or a state in which the setting value can be confirmed) can be grasped visually.

In the first case, the sound output means is means for outputting the opening notification sound as a first sound (for example, the voice of person A saying "the door is open"), and the sound The output means converts the opening notification sound to a second sound (for example, "The door is open!") when the door changes from the closed state to the open state after the certain state ends. The first sound and the second sound may be different sounds.

With such a configuration, when the door body changes from the closed state to the open state after a certain state (either the state in which the set value can be changed or the state in which the set value can be confirmed) is completed. Secondly, in order to output a second sound different from the first sound to be output during a certain state, the amusement store clerk or the like is informed again that a certain state has been completed by changing the output sound. , can be recognized. In addition, when executing various settings, there is a risk of forgetting whether settings have been changed or confirmed. can be made to recognize again.

Further, when the setting value is changeable and the door is closed, a first setting screen (for example, an operation check screen shown in FIG. screen) is started, and when the setting value is changeable and the door is open, the display of the first setting screen is not started, and the setting value can be confirmed and the door is closed or/and opened, a second setting screen (for example, volume setting, etc. shown in FIG. 49(e)) is displayed. setting screen) may be started, and the first setting and the second setting may be at least partially different settings.

With such a configuration, the items that can be set in setting change and the items that can be set in setting confirmation can be separately provided, so that the work efficiency and convenience of game store clerks and the like can be improved.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned "timing at which a certain state ends" is "timing at which the certain operation by the setting key is ended after changing the set value" in the state where the set value can be changed. In the state in which the setting value can be confirmed, it may be "the timing at which the certain operation by the setting key is completed while the setting value is being displayed".

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 20) includes setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values, and an openable and closable door body ( For example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 20), reporting means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, storage number display 125, speakers 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight 148, effect button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), and a certain operation (for example, operation to turn on from off) by the setting key is performed. When the power is turned on, the setting value is changed (for example, setting change mode), and after the power is turned on, the certain operation (for example, turning on from off) by the setting key is performed. When done, the setting value can be confirmed (for example, setting confirmation mode), and in the setting value changeable state, the first setting (one or more) (for example, speaker check, character check, effect button check) can be set, and in the state where the setting value can be confirmed, (one or more) second settings (for example, volume setting, setting change history, error history, time setting, setting of power saving mode), the notification means is means including display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and the setting value is changeable and the door is open. (for example, when the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 47(b)), the display means does not display the display regarding the first setting, and the first setting cannot be set, the set value can be changed, and the door is closed (for example, when the front door 102 is closed in the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 47(c) ), the display means can display a display related to the first setting (for example, a setting screen including an operation check screen shown in FIG. 47(c)), can set the first setting, In the state in which the set value can be confirmed, the door body is in either the closed state or the open state (for example, the front door 102 is open in the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 49(e)). case, or when the front door 102 is closed in the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 50(c)), the display means displays the second setting (for example, , a setting screen on which sound volume can be set, etc.), and the second setting can be set.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, setting change is an important task in which mistakes are not allowed compared to setting confirmation, but when the door body is in the open state in setting change, the first setting cannot be executed. By making it possible, it is possible to prevent setting errors in setting changes. In addition, when the door is closed, the operating means (setting keys, setting switches, etc.) inside the housing cannot be operated, so the first setting is executed only when the door is closed. By making it possible, it is possible to prevent mistakes such as erroneously changing the settings in the first setting. In addition, since it is possible to set whether the door is open or closed while the settings are being checked, there is no need to temporarily close the door. can increase

It should be noted that the "first setting" and "second setting" according to the present invention are not limited to the exemplified settings, and the light amount setting of the light emitting means such as the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144, and the past setting confirmation history. (Date and time, set value at the time of setting confirmation, etc.), history of the number of past jackpots, etc. may be used.

Also, the first setting and the second setting may be settings that are at least partially different.

With such a configuration, the first setting that can be set when changing the setting and the second setting that can be set when confirming the setting can be provided separately, thereby improving the work efficiency and convenience of the store clerk, etc. be able to. At least part of the first setting and at least part of the second setting may be interchangeable. It may be possible to move to the setting.

Further, the notification means is means including operation means (for example, effect button 192), the first setting is a setting that can be executed by the operation by the operation means, and the second setting is the It is a setting that can be executed by an operation by an operation means, and when the door body is in the open state, the operation means is the notification means capable of executing an open notification indicating that the door body is in the open state. The operation means is means capable of executing an operation based on a certain operation pattern, and the first setting includes checking the operation of the operation means (e.g., vibration or light emission). check), and when the door body is in the open state, the operation of the operating means may be disabled.

With such a configuration, since the operation check of the operation means is included in the first setting, it cannot be performed when the door body is in the open state in changing the setting, and the operation means can be made to function as the notification means. can be done.

In addition, a certain effect means (for example, a speaker, a character (movable body), a effect button) capable of executing an action based on a certain action pattern is provided, and the effect means is a means including the operation means, The certain effect means is a effect means arranged at a position where the action can be checked from the front of the game machine (hereinafter referred to as "action check"), and the first setting includes the action A check may be included.

With such a configuration, the operation check can be executed in the setting change which is more important than the setting confirmation, and the first setting is executed when the door body is in the open state in the setting change. By making it impossible, it is possible to prevent the operation check from being executed in the open state.

The second setting includes history information indicating the past history of the gaming machine (for example, setting change history (history of setting values changed by setting change), error history (history of errors that occurred in the past, )), and settings related to power saving mode.

With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance convenience in setting confirmation.

The second settings may include settings that are not initialized (settings that are not reset to initial values) when the setting value is changed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance convenience in setting confirmation.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 20) is a gaming machine having setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values. When the power is turned on in a state in which a certain operation has been performed with the setting key, the setting value can be changed (for example, a setting change mode), and after the power is turned on, the setting key When the certain operation is performed, the setting value is in a state in which the setting value can be confirmed (for example, setting confirmation mode), and in the state in which the setting value can be changed, (one or more) first setting ( For example, speaker check, character check, effect button check) can be set, and when the setting value can be confirmed, (one or more) second settings (for example, volume setting, setting change history, error history, time setting, power saving mode setting), and the first setting and the second setting are at least partially different settings.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, the first setting that can be set when changing the setting and the second setting that can be set when confirming the setting can be separately provided. can enhance sexuality.

In addition, a certain effect means capable of executing an action based on a certain action pattern (for example, a speaker, a character (movable body), and an effect button) is provided. The effect means may be placed at a position where an action check (hereinafter referred to as "action check") is possible, and the first setting may include the action check.

With such a configuration, the operation check can be executed in the setting change which is more important than the setting confirmation, and the first setting is executed when the door body is in the open state in the setting change. By making it impossible, it is possible to prevent the operation check from being executed in the open state.

In addition, a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 20) that can be opened and closed is provided, the notification means is means including display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and the setting value can be changed. and when the door body is in an open state (for example, when the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 47(b)), the display means displays the first setting. is not displayed, the first setting cannot be set, the set value is changeable, and the door is closed (for example, in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 47(c) When the front door 102 is closed), the display means can display the display related to the first setting, the first setting can be set, and the setting value can be confirmed, Regardless of whether the door body is in the closed state or the open state (for example, when the front door 102 is open in the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 49(e), , when the front door 102 is closed in the setting confirmation mode), the display means may be capable of displaying a display relating to the second setting and setting the second setting.

With such a configuration, setting change is an important task in which mistakes are not allowed compared to setting confirmation, but when the door body is in the open state in setting change, the first setting cannot be executed. This makes it possible to prevent setting errors in setting changes. In addition, when the door is closed, the operating means (setting keys, setting switches, etc.) inside the housing cannot be operated, so the first setting is executed only when the door is closed. By making it possible, it is possible to prevent mistakes such as erroneously changing the settings in the first setting. In addition, since it is possible to set whether the door is open or closed while the settings are being checked, there is no need to temporarily close the door. can increase

Further, a door body that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 20) is provided, the notification means is a means including an operation means (for example, a production button 192), and the first setting is the operation means, the second setting is a setting that can be executed by an operation by the operating means, and the operating means controls the opening of the door when the door is in the open state. is means for functioning as the notification means capable of executing an open notification indicating that the is in the open state, the operation means is means capable of executing an operation based on a certain operation pattern, and the first The setting includes checking the operation of the operating means (for example, checking vibration or light emission), and even if the operation of the operating means is disabled when the door is in the open state. good.

With such a configuration, since the operation check of the operation means is included in the first setting, it cannot be performed when the door body is in the open state in changing the setting, and the operation means can be made to function as the notification means. can be done.

In addition, a certain effect means (for example, a speaker, a character (movable body), a effect button) capable of executing an action based on a certain action pattern is provided, and the effect means is a means including the operation means, The certain effect means is a effect means arranged at a position where the action can be checked from the front of the game machine (hereinafter referred to as "action check"), and the first setting includes the action A check may be included.

With such a configuration, the operation check can be executed in the setting change which is more important than the setting confirmation, and the first setting is executed when the door body is in the open state in the setting change. By making it impossible, it is possible to prevent the operation check from being executed in the open state.

In addition, the second setting includes either confirmation of history information (for example, setting change history, error history) indicating the past history of the gaming machine, or setting of a power saving mode. good too.

With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance convenience in setting confirmation.

Also, the second setting may include a setting that is not initialized when the setting value is changed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance convenience in setting confirmation.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 20) is a gaming machine having setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values. When the power is turned on in a state in which a certain operation has been performed with the setting key, the setting value can be changed (for example, a setting change mode), and after the power is turned on, the setting key When the certain operation is performed, the setting value is in a state in which the setting value can be confirmed (for example, setting confirmation mode), and in the state in which the setting value can be changed, (one or more) first setting ( For example, speaker check, character check, effect button check) can be set, and when the setting value can be confirmed, (one or more) second settings (for example, volume setting, setting change history, error history, time setting, power saving mode setting), the first setting and the second setting are settings that are at least partially different, and the second setting includes the power saving mode This game machine is characterized by including at least settings related to.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, the first setting that can be set when changing the setting and the second setting that can be set when confirming the setting can be separately provided. can enhance sexuality.

In addition, a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 20) that can be opened and closed is provided, the notification means is means including display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and the setting value can be changed. and when the door body is in an open state (for example, when the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 47(b)), the display means displays the first setting. is not displayed, the first setting cannot be set, the set value is changeable, and the door is closed (for example, in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 47(c) When the front door 102 is closed), the display means can display the display related to the first setting, the first setting can be set, and the setting value can be confirmed, Regardless of whether the door body is in the closed state or the open state (for example, when the front door 102 is open in the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 49(e), , when the front door 102 is closed in the setting confirmation mode), the display means may be capable of displaying a display relating to the second setting and setting the second setting.

With such a configuration, setting change is an important task in which mistakes are not allowed compared to setting confirmation, but when the door body is in the open state in setting change, the first setting cannot be executed. This makes it possible to prevent setting errors in setting changes. In addition, when the door is closed, the operating means (setting keys, setting switches, etc.) inside the housing cannot be operated, so the first setting is executed only when the door is closed. By making it possible, it is possible to prevent mistakes such as erroneously changing the settings in the first setting. In addition, since it is possible to set whether the door is open or closed while the settings are being checked, there is no need to temporarily close the door. can increase

Further, a door body that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 20) is provided, the notification means is a means including an operation means (for example, a production button 192), and the first setting is the operation means, the second setting is a setting that can be executed by an operation by the operating means, and the operating means controls the opening of the door when the door is in the open state. is means for functioning as the notification means capable of executing an open notification indicating that the is in the open state, the operation means is means capable of executing an operation based on a certain operation pattern, and the first The setting includes checking the operation of the operating means (for example, checking vibration or light emission), and even if the operation of the operating means is disabled when the door is in the open state. good.

With such a configuration, since the operation check of the operation means is included in the first setting, it cannot be performed when the door body is in the open state in changing the setting, and the operation means can be made to function as the notification means. can be done.

In addition, a certain effect means (for example, a speaker, a character (movable body), a effect button) capable of executing an action based on a certain action pattern is provided, and the effect means is a means including the operation means, The certain effect means is a effect means arranged at a position where the action can be checked from the front of the game machine (hereinafter referred to as "action check"), and the first setting includes the action A check may be included.

With such a configuration, the operation check can be executed in the setting change which is more important than the setting confirmation, and the first setting is executed when the door body is in the open state in the setting change. By making it impossible, it is possible to prevent the operation check from being executed in the open state.

Also, the second setting may include a setting that is not initialized when the setting value is changed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance convenience in setting confirmation.

<Operation of movable body>
Next, the operation of the movable bodies included in the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 61. FIG.

FIG. 53(a) is a front view showing a state in which the movable body KT has moved to the upper limit position (second position), and FIG. It is the front view which showed the state which moved to.

The movable body KT is a member that can move up and down in front of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 . In this example, it is driven by a driving means (not shown), and vertically moves between the upper limit position (second position) shown in FIG. 53(a) and the lower limit position (first position) shown in FIG. 53(b). is configured to be movable to

In addition, the "moving direction" of the movable body according to the present invention is not limited to this example. , right and left directions, and oblique directions may be combined.

<Operation of movable body/first position, second position, third position>
Next, the first position, second position, and third position to which the movable body KT can move will be described.

The lower limit position (first position) shown in FIG. 53(b) is a position where the movable body KT is not exposed (protruded) outside the outer edge (lower end) of the front door 102 (door body). In the front view of 100, the lower end KTd of the movable body KT and the lower end 102d of the front door 102 are at positions where they substantially overlap (overlap).

At the upper limit position (second position) shown in FIG. 53(a), at least part of the movable body KT (in this example, substantially the entire movable body KT) is positioned at the outer edge (upper end) of the front door 102 (door body). In the front view of the slot machine 100, the lower end KTd of the movable body KT and the upper end 102u of the front door 102 substantially overlap (overlap).

The "first position" and "second position" of the movable body according to the present invention are not limited to this example. The first position may be a position where the upper end substantially overlaps (overlapping), and the second position may be a position where the upper end of the movable body and the lower end of the front door 102 substantially overlap (overlapping).

Further, for example, when the movable body is a member that can move in the left-right direction in front of the front door 102, the right end of the movable body and the right end of the front door 102 are substantially overlapped when viewed from the front of the slot machine 100. The position where the right end of the movable body and the left end of the front door 102 substantially overlap (overlap) may be the second position, or the left end of the movable body may be the first position. and the left end of the front door 102 almost overlap (overlap) is the first position, and the position where the left end of the movable body and the right end of the front door 102 almost overlap (overlap) is the second position There may be.

The third position is a position other than the first position and the second position described above. For example, the position shown in FIG. A position (a position in the middle of the second position) is applicable.

<Operation of Movable Body/First Operation (First Case)>
Next, the first operation (first case) of the movable body KT will be described.

FIGS. 53(c) to 53(f) show an example of the first motion of the movable body KT when the movable body KT is positioned at the lower limit position (first position) before the power is turned on (first case). is a diagram showing in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 53(c) is the state before the power is turned on. In this example, the movable body KT is positioned at the lower limit position (first position) with the front door 102 closed. .

In this state, since the front door 102 is closed, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 announce the opening (for example, blinking red), and the speakers 272 and 277 make an opening announcement sound (for example, "The door is open") is not output.

The state shown in FIG. 53(d) is a state in which a store clerk or the like opens the front door 102 and operates the power switch arranged inside the main body 101 to turn on the power.

In this state, since the front door 102 is open, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 flash in red to notify that the front door 102 is open (open notification). , the speakers 272 and 277 output an open notification sound indicating that the door is in the open state (in this example, the sound "the door is open").

When the movable body KT of the slot machine 100 is powered on while the front door 102 (door body) is open (first state), the first operation is started. Also, the first operation differs depending on the position of the movable body KT when the power is turned on. In the first case, the movable body KT moves from the lower limit position (first position) to the third position as the first operation. to return to the lower limit position (first position).

In the state shown in FIG. 53(d), when the front door 102 is open, the movable body KT is positioned at the lower limit position (first position). ), the movable body KT is moved from the lower limit position (first position) to the lower limit position (first position) and upper limit position (second position ) to the intermediate position (third position), as shown in (e) to (f) of the same figure, the lower limit position (first position) and the upper limit position (second position) from the intermediate position (third position) to the lower limit position (first position).

According to this example, when the power is turned on in the state where the door is open (first state), the movable body starts the first operation. Operation confirmation can be performed reliably and easily, and the convenience of game store clerks and the like can be enhanced.

In addition, since the first motion includes the motion of moving the movable body to the first position, whether or not the movable body has moved to the first position determines whether the movable body performs the first motion normally. It is possible to reliably determine whether or not the

In addition, there is a case (first case) in which the movable body is positioned at the first position while the door is open (first state). As the operation of , since the operation of returning from the first position to the first position via the third position is started, even if the movable body is located at the first position, the movable body can be confirmed to work properly.

<Action of movable body/Second action>
Next, the second motion of the movable body KT will be described.

FIGS. 53(g) to 54(d) are diagrams showing an example of the second motion of the movable body KT in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 53(g) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed while the movable body KT that has completed the first motion is positioned at the lower limit position (first position).

In this state, since the front door 102 is closed, the opening notification by the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 are terminated.

The movable body KT of the slot machine 100 starts a second operation when the front door 102 (door body) changes from the open state (first state) to the closed state. This second motion is a motion including a certain motion regardless of the position of the movable body KT at the start of the second motion.

The mode of a certain operation is not particularly limited, but a certain operation in this example is to move the movable body KT from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position), It is an operation of returning to the lower limit position (first position) and moving again from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position).

In the state shown in FIG. 53(g), the state in which the front door 102 (door body) is open (the first state) has changed to the state in which it is closed. is raised from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position) as shown in FIGS. c), it is lowered from the upper limit position (second position) to the lower limit position (first position), and as shown in FIGS. position) to the upper limit position (second position).

According to this example, when the door changes from the open state (first state) to the closed state, the movable body starts the second operation. , the operation of the movable body can be reliably and easily confirmed, and the convenience of game store clerks and the like can be enhanced.

In addition, since the second motion is a motion including a certain motion regardless of the position of the movable body at the start of the second motion, it is possible to confirm a common motion regardless of the position of the movable body. It is possible to check the operation without fail.

<Action of the movable body/Second action (second state. When the movable body is at the first position)>
Next, the second operation of the movable body KT (second state, when the movable body is at the first position) will be described.

54(e) to 55(c), the front door 102 is in the closed state and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state (second state), and the movable body KT is positioned at the lower limit position (first position). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body KT in time series when the power is turned on in the state where the movable body KT is on;

As described above, the slot machine 100 opens the front door 102 (door body) by performing a certain operation on the open/close sensor (detecting means) capable of detecting the open/closed state of the front door 102 (door body). The detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is set to the state of detecting the closing of the door (open detection state, second state) even when the door is in the closed state.

Specifically, when the front door 102 is in the open state, a light shielding piece of a certain length is inserted between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 and fixed with tape or the like, and the main body is opened. By shielding the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor 101, even if the front door 102 is open, the detection state of the open/close sensor can be forced to the closed detection state.

The state shown in FIG. 54(e) is the state before the power is turned on. In this example, the movable body KT is positioned at the lower limit position (first position) with the front door 102 closed. .

In this state, since the front door 102 is closed, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 announce the opening (for example, blinking red), and the speakers 272 and 277 make an opening announcement sound (for example, "The door is open") is not output.

In the state shown in FIG. 54(f), the store clerk opens the front door 102, forcibly changes the detection state of the open/close sensor to the closed detection state, and turns on the power switch arranged inside the main body 101. It has been operated and the power has been turned on.

In this state, the front door 102 is open, but the detection state of the open/close sensor is forcibly changed to the closed detection state (second state). The opening notification by the side lamp 144 (for example, blinking red) and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 (for example, the sound "the door is open") are not output.

When the movable body KT is turned on in the second state (the front door 102 is in the closed state and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state), the movable body KT first moves to the upper limit position (second position) without starting the first operation. is configured to initiate a second action that includes the action of moving to the

In the state shown in FIG. 54(f), the power is turned on when the movable body KT is positioned at the lower limit position (first position) in the second state (the front door 102 is closed and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state). 54(f) to 54(h), the movable body KT is moved as shown in FIGS. 54(f) to 54(h). 55(h) to FIG. 55(b), after first rising to the upper limit position (second position), from the upper limit position (second position) to the lower limit position (first position ), and moves from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position) as shown in FIGS.

According to this example, it is possible to check the operation of the movable body even when the door body is in the closed state, thereby enhancing the convenience of the store clerk or the like of the amusement arcade.

<Action of movable body/first action (second case)>
Next, the first operation (second case) of the movable body KT will be described.

FIGS. 55(d) to 56(f) show an example of the first motion of the movable body KT when the movable body KT is not positioned at the lower limit position (first position) (second case) before the power is turned on. is a diagram showing in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 55(d) is the state before the power is turned on. In this example, the front door 102 is closed and the movable body KT is not positioned at the lower limit position (first position). Instead, it is located at an intermediate position (third position) between the lower limit position (first position) and the upper limit position (second position).

In this state, since the front door 102 is closed, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 announce the opening (for example, blinking red), and the speakers 272 and 277 make an opening announcement sound (for example, "The door is open") is not output.

In the state shown in FIG. 55(e), the store clerk or the like opens the front door 102 and turns on the power to change the setting (the setting key provided inside the main body 101 is turned on from off). The power is turned on while the power is on).

This state is a state in which the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode (a state in which the set value can be changed), so the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 flash in red, and the front door 102 is open. In addition to outputting an opening notification sound (in this example, the sound "the door is open") from the speakers 272 and 277, the setting change notification sound (this example In this example, the voice "Settings are being changed") is repeatedly output.

In the slot machine 100, the first operation differs depending on the position of the movable body KT when the power is turned on. There is a case (second case) in which the movable body KT is positioned at a position different from the position of ( second position) to the lower limit position (first position).

In the state shown in FIG. 55(e), when the power is turned on, the movable body KT is positioned at a position different from the lower limit position (first position). case), the movable body KT is raised from a certain position to the upper limit position (second position) and then lowered to the lower limit position (first position) as shown in FIG. I do.

In this example, the power-on accompanied by the setting change has been described. The operation is the same when the power is turned on without changing the settings.

According to this example, when the door is open (first state), the movable body may be positioned at a position different from the first position (second case). In the case of the first case, the movable body, as the first action, starts the action of moving from a certain position to the first position via the second position. By the difference, it is possible to grasp the position of the movable body when the power is turned on.

The state shown in FIG. 55(g) is a state in which a certain operation by the setting key is canceled (the setting key is pulled out after an operation to turn the setting key from on to off is performed), and the setting change mode is finished.

In this state, since the setting change mode (a state in which setting values can be changed) has ended, a setting change completion notification sound (in this example, the sound "setting change is completed") is output from the speakers 272 and 277. At the same time, since the front door 102 is open, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 flash in red to notify that the front door 102 is open (open notification).

The state shown in FIG. 56(a) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed while the movable body KT that has completed the first motion is positioned at the lower limit position (first position).

In this state, since the front door 102 is closed, the opening notification by the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 are terminated.

The movable body KT of the slot machine 100 starts a second operation when the front door 102 (door body) changes from the open state (first state) to the closed state. This second motion is a motion including a certain motion regardless of the position of the movable body KT at the start of the second motion.

In addition, a certain operation in this example is to move the movable body KT from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position), return it to the lower limit position (first position), and then , from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position).

In the state shown in FIG. 56(a), since the front door 102 (door body) has changed from the open state (first state) to the closed state, the movable body KT is raised from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position) as shown in FIGS. e), it is lowered from the upper limit position (second position) to the lower limit position (first position), and as shown in FIGS. position) to the upper limit position (second position).

According to this example, when the door changes from the open state (first state) to the closed state, the movable body starts the second operation. , the operation of the movable body can be reliably and easily confirmed, and the convenience of game store clerks and the like can be enhanced.

In addition, since the second motion is a motion including a certain motion regardless of the position of the movable body at the start of the second motion, it is possible to confirm a common motion regardless of the position of the movable body. It is possible to check the operation without fail.

<Action of movable body/second action (second state, when movable body is in third position)>
Next, the second operation of the movable body KT (second state, when the movable body is at the third position) will be described.

57(a) to 57(f) show that when the front door 102 is in a closed state and the open/close sensor is in an open detection state (second state), the movable body KT is at the lower limit position (first position) and the upper limit position ( FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body KT in chronological order when the power is turned on while the movable body KT is in a position (third position) other than the second position).

The state shown in FIG. 57(a) is the state before the power is turned on. In this example, when the front door 102 is closed, the movable body KT is at the lower limit position (first position) and the upper limit position (first position). position (second position) (third position).

In this state, since the front door 102 is closed, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 announce the opening (for example, blinking red), and the speakers 272 and 277 make an opening announcement sound (for example, "The door is open") is not output.

In the state shown in FIG. 57(b), the store clerk or the like opens the front door 102, forcibly changes the detection state of the open/close sensor to the closed detection state, and turns on the power switch arranged inside the main body 101. It has been operated and the power has been turned on.

In this state, the front door 102 is open, but the detection state of the open/close sensor is forcibly changed to the closed detection state (second state). The opening notification by the side lamp 144 (for example, blinking red) and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 (for example, the sound "the door is open") are not output.

When the movable body KT is turned on in the second state (the front door 102 is in the closed state and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state), the movable body KT first moves to the upper limit position (second position) without starting the first operation. is configured to initiate a second action that includes the action of moving to the

The state shown in FIG. 57(b) is a state in which the power is turned on in the second state (the front door 102 is in the closed state and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state), so the second operation (the second state ), the movable body KT is first raised to the upper limit position (second position) as shown in FIGS. ), it is lowered from the upper limit position (second position) to the lower limit position (first position), and as shown in FIG. ) to the upper limit position (second position).

According to this example, it is possible to check the operation of the movable body even when the door body is in the closed state, thereby enhancing the convenience of the store clerk or the like of the amusement arcade.

<Action of movable body/second action (second state. When movable body is in second position)>
Next, the second operation of the movable body KT (second state, when the movable body is at the second position) will be described.

58(a) to 58(e), the front door 102 is in the closed state and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state (second state), and the movable body KT is positioned at the upper limit position (second position). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body KT in time series when the power is turned on in the state where the movable body KT is on;

The state shown in FIG. 58(a) is the state before the power is turned on. In this example, the movable body KT is positioned at the upper limit position (second position) with the front door 102 closed. .

In this state, since the front door 102 is closed, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 announce the opening (for example, blinking red), and the speakers 272 and 277 make an opening announcement sound (for example, "The door is open") is not output.

The state shown in FIG. 58B is a state in which the front door 102 is opened by an amusement store clerk or the like, and the power is turned on by operating the power switch arranged inside the main body 101 .

In this state, the front door 102 is open, but the detection state of the open/close sensor is forcibly changed to the closed detection state (second state). The opening notification by the side lamp 144 (for example, blinking red) and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 (for example, the sound "the door is open") are not output.

When the movable body KT is positioned at the second position in the second state (the front door 102 is in the closed state and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state), the movable body KT performs a second action from the second position to It is configured to initiate movement through the first position and back to the second position.

In the state shown in FIG. 58(b), the power is turned on when the movable body KT is positioned at the upper limit position (second position) in the second state (the front door 102 is closed and the open/close sensor is open detection state). 58(b) to 58(d), the movable body KT is moved as shown in FIGS. Then, it is lowered from the upper limit position (second position) to the lower limit position (first position), and as shown in FIG. (Second position).

According to this example, it is possible to check the operation of the movable body even when the door body is in the closed state, thereby enhancing the convenience of the store clerk or the like of the amusement arcade.

<movable body movement / door opening during normal game>
Next, the operation of the movable body KT when the door body is opened during the normal game will be described.

FIGS. 59(a) to 59(g) are diagrams showing an example of the motion of the movable body KT during the normal game in chronological order.

The movable body KT is located at the upper limit position (second position) in the normal game state (certain state), but in the normal game state (certain state), the door body is open (first state) to the closed state, it is configured to initiate movement from the upper limit position (second position) to the lower limit position (first position).

The state shown in FIG. 59(a) is a state in which the movable body KT is used in the normal game state (the front door 102 is closed), and the movable body effect is performed in the normal game state in this example. The inside is configured to move the movable body KT to the upper limit position (second position).

Since this state is the normal game state, in addition to the movable object production by the movable body KT, production by the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144, production sounds by the speakers 272 and 277, and the like are performed.

The state shown in FIG. 59(b) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened by a store clerk or the like in the state shown in FIG. 59(a), and the normal game state is interrupted.

In this state, since the front door 102 is open, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 flash in red to notify that the front door 102 is open (open notification). , speakers 272 and 277 repeatedly output an open notification sound (in this example, the sound "the door is open").

In addition, since the front door 102 is opened in the normal game state, the movable body KT is moved from the upper limit position (second position) to the lower limit position (second position) as shown in FIGS. 1 position).

According to this example, when the movable body is positioned at the second position (the position exposed outside the outer edge of the door) and the door is opened, the movable body moves to the first position (the outer edge of the door). To ensure safety by preventing a situation in which a store clerk or a player touches a movable body and is injured because the motion is moved to a position where the movable body is not exposed to the outside). can be done.

FIG. 59(e) shows a state in which the opened front door 102 is closed and the normal game state is resumed.

Since the same state is a state in which the front door 102 is closed, the opening notification by the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 are terminated, and the normal game state is restored. Therefore, an effect is produced by the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144, an effect sound is output by the speakers 272 and 277, and the like.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 59(f) is a state in which the effect button 192 or the start lever 135 is operated in the normal game state.

In this example, when the effect button 192 or the start lever 135 is operated, the movable body KT is moved from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position ( second position), the movable body presentation by the movable body KT is resumed.

According to this example, the movable body can be moved to the second position (for example, the position where the normal effect is performed) without performing an operation to close the door body. Convenience can be improved.

<Operation of movable body/door closing during operation>
Next, the operation of the movable body KT when the door is opened during the operation of the movable body KT will be described.

FIGS. 60(a) to 61(a) are diagrams showing an example of the motion of the movable body KT in time series when the door is opened during the motion of the movable body KT.

The state shown in FIG. 60(a) is the state before the power is turned on. In this example, the front door 102 is closed and the movable body KT is positioned at the lower limit position (first position). .

In this state, since the front door 102 is closed, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 announce the opening (for example, blinking red), and the speakers 272 and 277 make an opening announcement sound (for example, "The door is open") is not output.

The state shown in FIG. 60(b) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened by a store clerk or the like, and the power is turned on by operating the power switch arranged inside the main body 101 .

In this state, since the front door 102 is open, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 flash in red to notify that the front door 102 is open (open notification). , the speakers 272 and 277 output an open notification sound indicating that the door is in the open state (in this example, the sound "the door is open").

53(d) to 53(f) because the movable body KT is positioned at the lower limit position (first position) when the front door 102 is open. As described above, as the first operation (first case), the movable body KT is moved from the lower limit position (first position) to the lower limit position (first position) and the upper limit position (second position). to the intermediate position (third position), and then from the intermediate position (third position) between the lower limit position (first position) and the upper limit position (second position) to the lower limit position (first position), but in this example, the front door 102 is closed during the upward movement.

The state shown in FIG. 60(d) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed while the movable body KT is being raised.

In this state, since the front door 102 is closed, the opening notification by the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 are terminated.

In addition, the movable body KT of the slot machine 100 is in the middle of moving from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position) (on the way up), or from the upper limit position (second position). When the front door 102 (door body) changes from an open state (first state) to a closed state while moving to the lower limit position (first position) (during descent), the first configured to initiate two actions.

In the state shown in FIG. 60(d), the front door 102 (door body) is open (first position) while moving from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position). 60(d) to 60(f), the movable body KT is moved to the upper limit as shown in FIGS. After rising to the position (second position), as shown in (f) to (h) of the same figure, it is lowered from the upper limit position (second position) to the lower limit position (first position), As shown in FIG. 61(h) to FIG. 61(a), the movement is performed from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position).

According to this example, it is possible to check the operation of the movable body even when the movable body is in motion, and it is possible to enhance the convenience of the staff of the amusement arcade.

In this example, the operation of the movable body KT when the front door 102 is closed during the upward movement of the movable body KT has been described. The same applies to the operation of the movable body KT when the front door 102 is closed while it is being moved from the lower limit position (first position).

<Operation/Modified Example of Movable Body>
Next, a modification of the operation of the movable body KT will be described. FIGS. 61(b) to 61(f) are diagrams showing variations of the motion of the movable body KT in chronological order.

In the above embodiment, when the movable body KT is powered on while the front door 102 (door body) is open (first state), the movable body KT starts the first operation and moves from the first state to the front door. 102 (door) is changed to a closed state, an example of starting the second operation has been shown. By operating the effect button 192 (operating means), the game store clerk or the like selects the item "movable body storage selection" as a trigger to start the first action or the second action. can be configured to

The state shown in FIG. 61(b) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed and the movable body storage selection item of the setting screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. In this example, the movable body KT is at the upper limit position. (Second position).

In the same state, since the item "movable body storage selection" is selected on the setting screen, a display prompting an operation to start the movement of the movable body KT (in this example, "press the effect button to temporarily The display of the character string "can be stored") has started.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 61(c) is a state in which a display prompting an operation for starting the motion of the movable body KT (display of a character string "You can retract the movable body once by operating the effect button") is being performed. , since the operation of the production button 192 is received, the movable body KT is lowered from the upper limit position (second position) to the lower limit position (first position), and the movable body KT moves from the outer edge of the front door 102. This is a state in which an operation has been performed to store it in a position where it is not exposed to the outside.

According to this example, the movable body can be moved to the first position (for example, a position not exposed to the outer edge of the door body) without performing an operation to close the door body. can be omitted and convenience can be improved.

Moreover, when the movable body is positioned at the first position, the movable body may be moved to the second position with the operation of a certain operating means as a trigger.

In the state shown in FIG. 61(d), the effect button 192 or the start lever 135 is operated in the state where the movable body is located at the lower limit position (first position) shown in FIG. 61(c). state.

In this example, when the effect button 192 or the start lever 135 is operated, the movable body KT is moved from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position ( 2nd position), the production by the movable body KT is started.

According to this example, the movable body can be moved to the second position (for example, the position where the normal effect is performed) without performing an operation to close the door body. Convenience can be improved.

As described above, the game table according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 20) includes a movable body (for example, the movable body KT shown in FIG. 34) and an openable and closable door body ( For example, a game table provided with a front door 102 shown in FIG. (d)), at least the first operation (for example, as shown in FIGS. 53(d) to 53(e), from the lower limit position (first position) to the lower limit position ( 1st position) and the upper limit position (second position) (third position), as shown in FIG. one position) and the upper limit position (second position) from the intermediate position (third position) to the lower limit position (first position)), the movable body, the first When the state changes to the state in which the door is closed (for example, the state shown in FIG. 53(g)), at least the second operation (for example, as shown in FIGS. 53(g) to 54(a) 54(a) to (c), after raising from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position), from the upper limit position (second position) The operation of lowering to the lower limit position (first position) and moving from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position) as shown in Figs. A game machine characterized by starting the

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, when the movable body changes from the state in which the door is open (first state) to the state in which the door is closed (second state), the second action is performed. Therefore, when the door is closed, the movement of the movable body can be checked reliably and easily, and the convenience of the store clerk or the like can be improved.

Further, when power is turned on in the first state, the first operation and an operation different from the first operation may be started, or the first state may be changed to the second state. Then, the second action and an action different from the second action may be initiated.

The first operation differs depending on the position of the movable body when the power is turned on. ).

With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably determine whether or not the movable body has normally performed the first operation based on whether or not the movable body has moved to the first position. Note that the first operation may be a preparatory operation for the second operation.

Further, in the first state, there is a case where the movable body is positioned at the first position (hereinafter referred to as "first case"). The movable body moves from the first position to the third position (for example, a position between the upper limit position and the lower limit position shown in FIG. It may be one that initiates an operation to return to .

With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm that the movable body operates normally even when the movable body is positioned at the first position.

Further, in the first state, there is a case where the movable body is positioned at a position different from the first position (hereinafter referred to as "second case"), and in the second case, When the power is turned on, the movable body moves from the certain position to the first position via a second position (for example, the upper limit position shown in FIG. 53(a)) as the first operation. It may be something that initiates an action.

With such a configuration, the position of the movable body when the power is turned on can be grasped by the difference in the first operation from the first case.

Further, the second motion is a certain motion (for example, as shown in FIGS. 53(g) to 54(a), the lower limit After moving up from the position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position), as shown in FIGS. (first position), and move from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position) as shown in (c) to (d) of FIG. may be

With such a configuration, a common operation can be confirmed regardless of the position of the movable body, and the operation can be reliably confirmed.

Further, a detection means (for example, an opening/closing sensor) capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door is provided, and the power supply can be turned on and off in the first state, and there is a certain aspect regarding the detection means. By performing an operation (for example, an operation of inserting a light shielding piece of a certain length between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 and fixing it with tape or the like), the first state is obtained. The detection means is configured to detect closing of the door (hereinafter referred to as the "second state") even if the door is closed, and when power is turned on in the second state. , the movable body may start the second motion including the motion of first moving to the second position without starting the first motion.

With such a configuration, it is possible to check the operation of the movable body even when the door body is in the closed state, thereby enhancing the convenience of the store clerk or the like of the amusement arcade.

The first position is a position where the movable body is not exposed outside the outer edge of the door (for example, the lower limit position shown in FIG. 53(b)), and the second position is the At least part of the movable body may be exposed outside the outer edge of the door (for example, the upper limit position shown in FIG. 53(a)).

With such a configuration, by moving the movable body to the first position, it is possible to prevent the movable body from being exposed outside the outer edge of the door body, thereby improving the safety of the staff of the amusement arcade. can be secured.

Further, in the third state, when the movable body is positioned at the second position, as the second operation, from the second position to the second position via the first position It may be configured to initiate a movement back into position.

Also, in a certain state (for example, normal game state), the movable body is located at the second position, but in this certain state, the door body is closed from the open state (first state). The movable body may start to move from the second position to the first position when the movable body changes to the state (second state).

Further, the movable body moves from the first position to the second position, or moves from the second position to the first position when the door body The second operation may be initiated when the open state (first state) changes to the closed state (second state).

<Error notification>
Next, error reporting that can be executed by the slot machine 100 will be described.

Errors that can occur in the slot machine 100 include door open error (door open error), hopper empty error, hopper error, medal insertion errors 1 to 4, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow error, RAM failure, Winning abnormality etc. are mentioned.

A door open error (door open error) is an error that notifies the opening of the door of the gaming machine, occurs when the front door 102 is opened, and is resolved when the front door 102 is closed.

A hopper empty error is a payout error related to the payout of medals, and is when the number of medals stored in the hopper accommodated inside the main body 101 falls below a specified number (for example, when the medal payout sensor remains off for 3000 ms or longer). If it does not change), it will be resolved by replenishing the hopper with more than the specified number of medals. A hopper error occurs when a connection abnormality such as disconnection is detected in the cable (wiring) connected to the hopper, and the first condition is satisfied (in this example, the connection abnormality of the hopper cable is resolved. ) later, when the second condition is satisfied (in this example, when the reset button is operated or the door is reset), the problem is resolved.

Medal insertion error 1 (medal insertion jam) occurs when inserted medals are stuck (for example, when the input state of the medal detection sensor does not change for 150 ms or more), and the error is canceled after removing the cause of the error. It is resolved when the switch, reset button, or door reset operation is accepted. Medal insertion error 2 occurs when the number of inserted medals exceeds a specified number, and can be resolved by changing the settings or clearing the RAM.

Medal insertion error 3 occurs when either insertion sensor 1 or insertion sensor 2 is turned on other than during medal insertion processing. (For example, when the medal detection sensor and proximity sensor detect an abnormal pattern), remove the cause of the error, and then operate the error release switch, reset button, or door reset. is canceled when it is accepted.

Medal payout error 1 (medal payout jam) occurs when there is no payout of medals for a certain period of time when the medal payout device is driven (for example, when the medal detection sensor continues to be on for 200 ms or more after changing from on to off). Medal payout error 2 occurs when medals remain while the medal payout device is being driven, and medal payout error 3 (unauthorized payout) occurs when either payout sensor 1 or payout sensor 2 is activated other than during medal payout processing. is turned on, and is resolved when the error release switch, reset button, or door reset operation is accepted after removing the cause of the error.

The overflow abnormality occurs when the overflow terminal of the medal auxiliary storage box is turned on, and is canceled when the operation of the error release switch, reset button, or door reset is accepted after removing the cause of the error. RAM failure (RWM failure) occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM, or when the number of medals inserted when accepting the start lever 135 is abnormal. If the door reset operation is accepted, or the setting is changed, the problem is resolved.

Winning abnormality (winning design abnormality) occurs when a winning design different from the winning determined by the internal lottery wins after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped (in the display judgment of the symbol combination, the conditional device is not activated on the effective line. Winning, operation, replay is displayed), and it is resolved when the error release switch, reset button, or door reset operation is accepted, or when the settings are changed. A backup error occurs when the backup data is abnormal when the power is turned on, or when the checksum value of the RAM (RWM) is abnormal, and when the error release switch, reset button, or door reset operation is accepted. , or can be resolved by changing the settings.

Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to slot machines, and can also be applied to pachinko machines. Errors that can occur in a pachinko machine include, for example, lower tray full error, payout device error, overpayment error, illegal payout error, main control unit communication error, magnetic abnormality error, magnetic field abnormality error, frame open error, RAM clear error , shock sensor errors, etc. These errors are also resolved when the operation of the error release switch, the reset button, or the door reset is accepted after the cause of the error is eliminated.

<Error notification/main board display, etc.>
Next, prior to explaining the error notification, the members (main board display, etc.) arranged inside the slot machine 100 will be explained with reference to FIG.

FIG. 62 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. The main body 101 is a box-shaped body surrounded by an upper plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a lower plate 264 and a rear plate 242, and having an open front.

Inside the main body 101, a main control board housing case 210 containing a main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242. Below, three reels 110-112 are arranged. A main board display (7-segment main board) 190 consisting of a 7-segment display is arranged on the main control board. The main board display 190 will be described later with reference to FIG. 63(b). The main board display 190 is one of reporting means capable of reporting game-related information (such as errors and operation states of operating means). is.

On the side of the main control board housing case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side plate 260, a sub control board housing case 220 containing the sub control board is arranged. In addition, an external centralized terminal board 248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in the bucket) is disposed on the lower plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is arranged, and a power switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252 . The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit and each device such as the main control unit 300 and sub-control units 400 and 500, which will be described later. do. In addition, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off. there is

A medal auxiliary storage box 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal dispensing device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind it (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 264 , and the power cord 264 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101 . there is

The front door 102 is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and above the pattern display window 113 is a production device 160 and a production control board ( not shown), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. Below the pattern display window 113, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals, and a path 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals onto the medal receiving tray 161. there is Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 181 .

<Error notification/notification means (display means)>
Next, the notification means provided in the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 63(a). FIG. 63(a) is a schematic view (front view) of main parts showing the notification means provided in the slot machine 100. FIG.

The slot machine 100 has display means capable of displaying as one of notification means. The display means provided in the slot machine 100 includes, for example, the liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157, payout number display device 127, accumulated number display device 125, game information display device 126, and FIG. and the main board display device 190, etc., which have been described using .

FIG. 63(b) is a diagram showing an example of display by the main board display 190. As shown in FIG. In this example, the main board display 190 is composed of a 7-segment display, and by lighting one, a plurality, or all of the seven segments a to g, predetermined game information is notified. It is possible.

Note that the main board display 190 is not limited to the 7-segment display, and other display means such as an LED may be applied. It goes without saying that the game information that can be reported is not limited to seven types.

In this example, the segment a of the main board display 190 is illuminated during operation of the reset button, and the segments b, c, and d are respectively the stop button 137 (left stop button) and the stop button 138 (middle reel stop button). ), and when the stop button 139 (right reel stop button) is operated, it lights up. In addition, segment e lights up when the front door 102 is open, segment f lights up when a hopper error occurs, and segment g lights up when an error requiring RAM clearing (for example, above-mentioned medal insertion error 2) occurs. Lights up when this occurs.

Note that the manner of reporting by each of the segments a to g is not limited to lighting of the segments, and it is also possible to report the states of the segments by blinking or turning off the segments. In addition, the main board display 190 may be any device as long as it can notify information related to the game, such as errors other than the exemplified errors (for example, RAM failure), and information other than the exemplified operation information (for example, game state, winning prizes, etc.). winning combination) may be notified.

<Various notification/notification means (sound output means)>
The slot machine 100 includes sound output means capable of outputting sound as one of notification means. Sound output means included in the slot machine 100 includes, for example, the speakers 272 and 277 described with reference to FIG.

<Various Notification/Notification Means (Light Emitting Means)>
The slot machine 100 includes light emitting means capable of emitting (outputting) light as one of notification means. Light-emitting means provided in the slot machine 100 include, for example, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the reel backlights 148 of the reels 110 to 112, the production button 192, the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the start lever. 135, etc., and in this example, all of these light emitting means are composed of LEDs.

The effect button 192, the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the start lever 135 also function as operating means that can be operated by the player. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, and examples of light-emitting means provided in the pachinko machine include frame lamps, effect buttons, accessories, and the like.

<Error notification of door open error>
Next, error notification when a door opening error occurs will be described. FIGS. 63(c) to 64(a) are diagrams showing an example of error notification when a door open error occurs.

The state shown in FIG. 63(c) is the state before the power is turned on.

In this state, since power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, the notification by the display means (liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, etc.), the notification by the light emission means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, etc.), None of the notification by the sound output means (speakers 277, 278) is performed.

The state shown in FIG. 63(d) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened by a store clerk or the like, and the power is turned on by operating the power switch arranged inside the main body 101 .

In this state, the power is supplied to the slot machine 100, and the open/close sensor detects the opening of the front door 102, so that the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 are flashed in red, so that the front door 102 is in an open state (open notification), and by lighting the segment e of the main board display 190 in red, a door open error notification indicating that the front door 102 is in an open state is provided. Then, the speakers 272 and 277 repeatedly output an opening notification sound (in this example, the sound "the door is open").

The state shown in FIG. 63(e) is a state in which a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, and preparations such as initial setting have been completed.

In this state, since preparations such as initial setting are completed, the stored number display 125 and the payout number display 127 are lit, and the normal screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, while the front door 102 Since the open state continues, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the opening notification (red flashing) by the production button 192, and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 (“The door is open”) voice) output and the door opening error notification by the main board display 19 (segment e lights up in red).

The state shown in FIG. 64(a) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed by a store clerk or the like of the amusement arcade.

In this state, since the opening/closing sensor detects the closing of the front door 102, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 notify the opening (blinking red), and the speakers 272 and 277 make the opening notification sound ("Door is open") and the door opening error notification by the main board display 19 (segment e lights up in red), while the stored number display 125 and the payout number display 127 light up and While continuing the display of the normal screen by the liquid crystal display device 157, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 are lit in the production mode.

<Error notification of hopper error>
Next, error notification when a hopper error occurs will be described.

FIGS. 64(b) to 65(f) are diagrams showing an example of error notification when a hopper error occurs.

The states shown in FIGS. 64(b) to 64(c) are substantially the same as the states described with reference to FIGS. 63(c) to 63(d). The state shown in FIG. 64(b) is different in that a hopper error (certain error) occurs before power is turned on.

Here, a hopper error (a certain error) occurs when a cable connection abnormality occurs due to disconnection of the cable connected to the hopper, etc., and the first condition is satisfied (in this example, the hopper cable This error is resolved when the second condition is satisfied (in this example, when the reset button is operated) after the connection abnormality is resolved.

<Error notification of hopper error/start of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 64(d) is a state in which a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, and preparations such as initial setting have been completed.

The slot machine 100 is configured to initiate at least a first announcement and a second announcement when a hopper error (some error) occurs.

In the same state, since a hopper error (certain error) has occurred before the power is turned on, an error code ("E4" in this example) is displayed using the payout number indicator 127 (first notification means). By displaying, hopper error notification (first notification) indicating that a hopper error has occurred, and by lighting the segment f (second notification means) of the main board display 190 in red , hopper error notification (second notification) indicating that a hopper error has occurred.

At the same time, an error display indicating that a hopper error has occurred is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. , since preparations such as initial setting are completed, the storage number display 125 is turned on.

In this state, since the front door 102 remains open, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 announce the opening (blinking red), and the speakers 272 and 277 emit an opening notification sound. (voice saying "the door is open") and the door open error notification by the main board display 19 (segment e lights up in red) are continued.

<Error notification of hopper error/resolved connection error → end of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 64(e) is a state in which the hopper error connection abnormality is resolved (the first condition is satisfied).

After the first notification (in this example, the hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) and the second notification (in this example, the hopper error notification by the segment f of the main board display 190), the slot machine 100 When one condition is satisfied (in this example, when the connection abnormality of the hopper error is resolved), the first notification (hopper error notification by the payout number indicator 127) is continued, while the first notification It is configured to end the second notification (hopper error notification by the main board indicator 190).

In the same state, since the connection abnormality of the hopper error has been resolved (the first condition is satisfied), the first notification (hopper error notification by the payout number indicator 127) is continued, while the second notification The notification (the hopper error notification by the segment f of the main board display 190) ends.

According to this example, since the first notification is continued even when the cause of a certain error is partially eliminated, it is possible to notify that the certain error has not been completely eliminated. Since the second notification is terminated, it is possible to notify that the state has changed in relation to a certain error, thereby improving the work efficiency and convenience of game store clerks and the like.

In this state, since the front door 102 remains open, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 announce the opening (blinking red), and the speakers 272 and 277 emit an opening notification sound. (voice saying "the door is open") and the door open error notification by the main board display 19 (segment e lights up in red) are continued.

<Error notification of hopper error/Reset button operation → Finish the first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 64(f) is a state in which the reset button is operated (the second condition is satisfied by the first operation) to resolve the hopper error (certain error).

In the same state, since the reset button was operated to eliminate the hopper error (the second condition was satisfied), the segment a (third notification means) of the main board display 190 lights up in red. As a result, a reset button operation notification (third notification) indicating that the reset button has been operated is performed, and the first notification ( Hopper error notification by payout number indicator 127) is ended.

According to this example, when an operation (reset button operation) is performed by a certain operation means, a certain error (hopper error) is eliminated, and a third Since the notification means (segment a of the main board display 190) performs the third notification (reset button operation notification by the segment a of the main board display 190), it is possible to notify the inside of the housing that a certain error has been resolved. The notification can be made in an easy-to-understand manner on the side, and the work efficiency and convenience of the store clerk or the like can be improved.

In addition, the "second condition" according to the present invention may be any condition that is satisfied when at least an operation is performed by a certain operation means. It may be an operation by operating means such as a setting switch, a setting key, a RAM clear button, or the like, or may be an operation such as a door reset, which will be described later.

In the same state, since the front door 102 remains open, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 announce the opening (blinking red), and the speakers 272 and 277 make the opening announcement sound. (voice saying "the door is open") and the door open error notification by the main board display 19 (segment e lights up in red) are continued.

<Error notification of hopper error / Solve hopper error → Close front door>
The state shown in FIG. 65(a) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed by an amusement store clerk or the like after the hopper error is resolved.

In this state, since the opening/closing sensor detects the closing of the front door 102, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 notify the opening (blinking red), and the speakers 272 and 277 make the opening notification sound ("Door is open") and the door opening error notification by the main board display 19 (segment e lights up in red), while the stored number display 125 and the payout number display 127 light up and While continuing the display of the normal screen by the liquid crystal display device 157, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 are lit in the production mode.

<Error notification of hopper error/Second hopper error → power on>
In the state shown in FIG. 65(b), a store clerk opens the front door 102 in a state where the second hopper error occurs, and operates the power switch arranged inside the main body 101 to turn on the power. is put in.

Since this state is almost the same as the state explained using FIG. 64(c), its explanation is omitted, but the state shown in FIG. The difference is that the hopper error (some error) has occurred again.

The state shown in FIG. 65(c) is a state in which a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, and preparations such as initial setting have been completed.

The slot machine 100 is configured to initiate at least a first announcement and a second announcement when a hopper error (some error) occurs.

In the same state, since a hopper error (certain error) has occurred before the power is turned on, an error code ("E4" in this example) is displayed using the payout number indicator 127 (first notification means). By displaying, hopper error notification (first notification) indicating that a hopper error has occurred, and by lighting the segment f (second notification means) of the main board display 190 in red , hopper error notification (second notification) indicating that a hopper error has occurred.

At the same time, an error display indicating that a hopper error has occurred is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. , since preparations such as initial setting are completed, the storage number display 125 is turned on.

When a certain error (hopper error in this example) occurs, the slot machine 100 starts an error-related voice notification until a certain condition is met (until the reset button is operated in this example). Continue voice notification. Also, if the power is turned on while a certain error (in this example, a hopper error) is occurring and the door (in this example, the front door 102) is in an open state, the door is open. A notification sound (first notification sound; in this example, open notification sound) indicating that there is an error is output. In connection with the occurrence of an error, it is configured to output a notification sound (second notification sound; in this example, a hopper error notification sound) prompting the elimination of the error.

In the same state, after the hopper error (a certain error) was resolved, a certain error occurred again, so an open notification sound ( Instead of the first notification sound (a voice that says “the door is open”), the hopper error notification sound (the second notification sound: in this example, “Hopper error. Please”), the hopper error is notified by voice.

According to this example, a notification sound (first notification sound) indicating that the door body is in an open state and a notification sound (second notification sound) prompting the elimination of a certain error, depending on the situation of the gaming machine, etc. sound) can be used properly, and convenience can be improved.

In addition, when the power is turned on in a state where a certain error occurs and the door is in an open state, the first notification sound is output, and after the certain error is resolved, the When an error occurs, the second notification sound is output, so when the power is turned on, the first notification sound can be output with priority, giving priority to the door being in the open state. can be notified.

In the same state, since the front door 102 remains open, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 announce the opening (blinking red), and the main board display 19 opens the door. Continue error notification (lighting of segment e in red).

In addition, the hopper error notification sound that prompts the hopper error to be resolved is not limited to a notification sound that includes a sound that can identify the type of error ("hopper error" in this example). After outputting a special notification sound (e.g., "Please call a staff member"), a notification sound that includes a sound that can identify the type of error (e.g., "Hopper error. Please call a staff member") may be output.

<Error notification of hopper error/resolved connection error → end of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 65(d) is a state in which the hopper error connection abnormality is resolved (the first condition is satisfied).

After the first notification (in this example, the hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) and the second notification (in this example, the hopper error notification by the segment f of the main board display 190), the slot machine 100 When one condition is satisfied (in this example, when the connection abnormality of the hopper error is resolved), the first notification (hopper error notification by the payout number indicator 127) is continued, while the first notification It is configured to end the second notification (hopper error notification by the main board indicator 190).

In the same state, since the connection abnormality of the hopper error has been resolved (the first condition is satisfied), the first notification (hopper error notification by the payout number indicator 127) is continued, while the second notification The notification (the hopper error notification by the segment f of the main board display 190) ends.

In the same state, since the second hopper error (certain error) continues, the speakers 272 and 277 produce a hopper error notification sound (second notification) that prompts the elimination of the hopper error (certain error). Sound."Hopper error. Please call a staff member." The open notification (red flashing) and the door open error notification by the main board display 19 (red lighting of segment e) are continued.

The state shown in FIG. 65(e) is a state in which the reset button is operated (the second condition is satisfied) to eliminate a hopper error (certain error), and the state shown in FIG. 65(f). is a state in which the front door 102 is closed by a store clerk or the like after the hopper error has been resolved. The explanation is omitted.

As described above, the amusement machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 20) includes an openable and closable door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 20) and notification means ( For example, liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, storage number display 125, speakers 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight 14, effect button 192, stop buttons 137-139, start lever 135 etc.), wherein the notifying means is means capable of notifying at least a certain error, and the notifying means includes sound output means (for example, speakers 272, 277) , the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a notification sound indicating that the door body is in an open state (hereinafter referred to as "first notification sound", for example, "the door is open"). The sound output means provides a notification sound (hereinafter referred to as "second notification sound") that prompts the elimination of the error in relation to the occurrence of the error. For example, "Hopper error. Staff Please call me."), and the sound output means outputs the first notification sound and the second The gaming machine is characterized in that it is means for outputting a notification sound.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, a notification sound (first notification sound) indicating that the door body is in an open state and a notification sound prompting to eliminate a certain error are generated according to the situation of the game machine. (Second notification sound) can be used properly, and convenience can be improved.

Further, display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157) is provided, and the display means provides a display (for example, "Hopper This is an error. Please call an attendant."

Further, the sound output means outputs the second notification sound without outputting the first notification sound when the door body is closed while the certain error is occurring. The sound output means outputs the first notification sound and the second notification sound when the door body is in the open state in the state where the certain error occurs. It may be a means that may output

With such a configuration, when the door is in the open state, a notification sound (first notification sound) indicating that the door is in the open state and a certain error resolution are generated depending on the situation. The prompting notification sound (second notification sound) can be used properly, and the convenience can be improved.

Further, the sound output means cuts off power in the state where the certain error occurs, and when the door body is in the open state when the power is turned on, the door body is in the open state. and outputting the first notification sound even when the error is resolved, and outputting the second notification sound when the error occurs again after the certain error is resolved. .

With such a configuration, when the power is turned on, the first notification sound can be preferentially output, and it is possible to preferentially notify that the door body is in the open state.

In addition, it has a setting means capable of setting one set value among a plurality of set values, and when the power is turned on in a state in which a certain operation (for example, an operation to turn on from off) is performed by a setting key enters a state in which the setting value can be changed (for example, a setting change mode), turns off the power in the state where the certain error occurs, and turns on the power in the state where the certain operation is performed, When the certain error is not resolved and the door is in the open state, the change of the set value is prioritized over the certain error, and the sound output means outputs the set value. Outputting the first notification sound without outputting a notification sound indicating that the value is in a changeable state, and outputting the second notification as notification of the certain error after the change of the set value is completed. It may be one that outputs sound.

With such a configuration, the setting change is prioritized over the notification of a certain error, so the setting change can be surely completed, and the setting change can be prevented from being forgotten. In addition, since the first notification sound is output after the setting change is completed, it is possible to reliably handle the error after the setting change is completed.

Further, when the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on in a state where the certain error occurs, and the door body is in the open state, the setting value of the set value is higher than the certain error. While giving priority to confirmation, the sound output means outputs the first notification sound without outputting a notification sound indicating that the setting value is in a confirmable state, and the confirmation of the setting value is completed. Afterwards, the second notification sound may be output as notification of the certain error.

Further, when the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on in the state where the certain error occurs, and the door body is in the closed state, the first notification sound is not output. The sound output means outputs a second notification sound, and the sound output means performs the certain operation after the power is turned on in the state where the certain error occurs, and the door body is in the open state. may output the first notification sound or may output the second notification sound.

In addition, a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157) is provided, and the power is turned on in a state in which the certain error has occurred and the certain operation has been performed, and the door is in the open state. In such a case, the change of the setting value is prioritized over the error, and the display means displays a setting changing display indicating that the setting value can be changed (for example, "setting change in progress"). display of a character string), and does not start a display indicating that a certain error has occurred (for example, display of a character string "Hopper error. Please call an attendant") can be anything.

Further, the sound output means always starts outputting the first notification sound regardless of the presence or absence of the certain error when the door body is in the open state when the power is turned on. There may be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably inform the store clerk or the like of the amusement arcade that the door is open.

<Error notification of hopper error/Resolution by door reset>
Next, the solution of the hopper error by door reset will be described.

FIGS. 66(a) to 66(f) are diagrams chronologically showing an example of a hopper error that is resolved by door reset. The states shown in FIGS. 66(a) to 66(d) are the same as the states described with reference to FIGS. e) Describe subsequent figures.

The state shown in FIG. 66(e) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed to eliminate a hopper error (a certain error) by door reset.

In the same state, since the hopper error (certain error) continues with the front door 102 closed, the output of the open notification sound ("the door is open") by the speakers 272 and 277 is stopped. On the other hand, by outputting a hopper error notification sound (in this example, ``Hopper error. Is going.

The state shown in FIG. 66(f) is a state in which the door has been reset (the second condition has been satisfied by the second operation).

Here, the door reset is an operation of inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 into the door key hole 140 described with reference to FIG. 20 and rotating it in a predetermined direction. Then, in addition to the above reset button operation (first operation), it is also possible to eliminate the hopper error by door reset (second operation).

In this state, since the hopper error (a certain error) has been resolved by the door reset, the first notification (hopper error notification by the payout number indicator 127) ends.

According to this example, the second operation (door reset) that can be executed with the door body (front door 102) closed is executed. Since the first notification by the one notification means (the hopper error notification by the payout number indicator 127) is completed, the fact that a certain error has been resolved can be confirmed even when the door is closed. The notification can be made in an easy-to-understand manner on the side, and the work efficiency and convenience of the store clerk or the like can be improved.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 20) has the first notification means (for example, the number of payouts shown in FIGS. 64(d) and (e)). display 127) and second notification means (for example, segment f of the main board display 190 shown in FIG. 64(d)), wherein the first notification means is or In at least a part of the period during which an error (e.g., hopper error) occurs (or the entire period during which a certain error occurs), the first notification (e.g., payout number indicator 127), and the second reporting means is capable of starting at least a part of the period during which the certain error occurs (or period of time), a means capable of initiating a second annunciation (e.g., a hopper error annunciation by segment f of the main board indicator 190), said certain error being the first condition met An error that is resolved when a second condition is met (e.g., the reset button is operated, or the door is reset) after (e.g., the connection failure of the hopper error has been resolved). there, when the certain error occurs, at least the first notification and the second notification are started, and if the first condition is satisfied after that, the first notification is continued; The gaming machine is characterized by ending the second notification.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 20) has a first notification means (for example, the payout number indicator 127 shown in FIGS. 64(d) and (e)). and a second notification means (for example, the segment f of the main board display 190 shown in FIG. 64(d)), wherein the first notification means detects an error (for example, , hopper error) during at least a part of the period (or the entire period during which a certain error occurs), the first notification (for example, the hopper error by the payout number indicator 127 The second notification means is capable of starting at least a part of the period during which the certain error occurs (or all of the period during which the certain error occurs). period), a means capable of initiating a second annunciation (e.g., hopper error annunciation by segment f of main board indicator 190), said certain error being the first condition met (e.g., hopper The error is resolved when the second condition is satisfied (for example, the reset button is operated or the door is reset) after the connection abnormality of the error is resolved, and the certain When an error occurs, at least the first notification and the second notification are started, and when the first condition is satisfied after that, the first notification is continued, while the second notification and the certain error is an error relating to the provision of game value (for example, payout of game media, provision of points that allow game execution).

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, since the first notification is continued even when the cause of a certain error is partially eliminated, it is notified that the certain error has not been completely eliminated. In addition, since the second notification is ended, it is possible to notify that the state has changed in relation to a certain error, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of the store clerk, etc. .

Further, a third notification means (for example, segment a of the main board display 190 shown in FIG. 64(f)) and a certain operation means (for example, reset button) are provided, and the second notification means and The third notification means is arranged inside the housing of the game machine, and the second condition is at least an operation by the certain operation means (hereinafter referred to as "first operation". For example, reset button operation) is performed, and the third notification means provides third notification (for example, by segment a of the main board display 190 when the first operation is performed It may be means capable of starting reset button operation notification).

With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the fact that a certain error has been resolved in an easy-to-understand manner inside the housing, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of the store clerk or the like. Moreover, said 3rd information may be performed in the state in which said 2nd information is not performed.

In addition, a door body that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 20) is provided, the first notification means is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine, and the second condition is the first The condition is also satisfied by performing a second operation (for example, door reset) different from the operation, the second operation is an operation that can be performed with the door closed, and the first The first notification may end in relation to the execution of the second operation.

With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the fact that a certain error has been resolved on the front side of the amusement arcade even when the door is closed, thereby enabling the work of the amusement arcade clerk or the like. Efficiency and convenience can be improved.

Further, display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 20) is provided, and the display means starts error display when the certain error occurs, and the first condition and the second condition are satisfied. is satisfied (for example, until the reset button is operated).

With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify by the display means that a certain error has been resolved, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of the store clerk or the like.

Further, sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 21) is provided, and the sound output means, when the error occurs, starts an audio notification of the error, and It may be means for continuing the voice notification until the condition and the second condition are satisfied (for example, until the reset button is operated).

With such a configuration, the clearing of a certain error can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner by the sound output means, and the work efficiency and convenience of the store clerk or the like can be improved.

Further, in order to satisfy the first condition and the second condition, an operation that can be executed with the door opened (for example, an operation means (setting key, setting switch) installed inside the main body 101) is required. , reset button, etc.) may be required. Further, the first notification means, the second notification means, or the third notification means may be display means such as a liquid crystal display device, or the first notification means or the The second notification means may be arranged on the front side of the gaming machine, or may be arranged inside the housing of the gaming machine.

In addition, the first condition or the second condition is a condition that is satisfied when an operation is performed by a certain operation means, a condition that is satisfied when a certain game state is entered, or a reset operation is performed. It may be a condition that is satisfied when the power is turned off, a condition that is satisfied when the power is turned off, or when the power is restored. Also, the reset button may also be used as a setting switch (a switch for changing settings). Also, the first notification or the second notification is not limited to the case where an error occurs when the power is turned on, but may be the case where an error occurs during the normal game state. Further, the certain error may be an error related to energization (hopper error), an error related to medals (medal insertion errors 1 to 4, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow error), or the like.

<Hopper error notification/setting change mode>
Next, error notification of a hopper error when shifting to the setting change mode will be described.

FIGS. 67(a) to 68(e) are diagrams showing an example of error notification of a hopper error in the case of shifting to the setting change mode in chronological order.

<Power on with hopper error notification/setting change>
The state shown in FIG. 67(a) is a state in which a hopper error (certain error) occurs before power is turned on.

In this state, since power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, the notification by the display means (liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, etc.), the notification by the light emission means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, etc.), None of the notification by the sound output means (speakers 277, 278) is performed.

The state shown in FIG. 67(b) is a state in which a store clerk or the like opens the front door 102 and the power is turned on while the setting key is turned on from off.

In this state, the power is supplied to the slot machine 100, and the open/close sensor detects the opening of the front door 102, so that the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 are flashed in red, so that the front door 102 is in an open state (open notification), and by lighting the segment e of the main board display 190 in red, a door open error notification indicating that the front door 102 is in an open state is provided. Then, the speakers 272 and 277 repeatedly output an opening notification sound (in this example, the sound "the door is open").

<Transition to error notification/setting change mode for hopper error>
The state shown in FIG. 67(c) is a state in which a hopper error (certain error) has occurred and the setting change mode has been entered.

When the power of the slot machine 100 is turned on in a state in which a certain operation (turning from off to on) has been performed by the setting key (or before a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on (when the control unit presses the setting key If the setting key is turned on from off before checking the on/off state of the ), the setting value shifts to a changeable state (setting change mode) and an error (in this example, the hopper error) has occurred, the state in which the setting value can be changed is maintained, and after the state in which the setting value can be changed ends, the first notification (in this example, the payout number display 127 Hopper error notification by ) and second notification (in this example, hopper error notification by segment f of main board display 190) are configured to start.

In the same state, a hopper error (some error) continues, but in this example, even if a hopper error (some error) state) is maintained (setting change takes precedence over notification of a certain error), a setting change indication indicating that the setting value can be changed (in this example, "setting change in progress"). ) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 in the first display mode (in this example, a display mode in which the character string "Setting changing" is placed in the center of the yellow background image). to display.

According to this example, the setting change is prioritized over the notification of a certain error, so the setting change can be reliably completed, and the setting change can be prevented from being forgotten. In addition, since the first notification and the second notification are performed after the setting change is completed, it is possible to reliably handle the error after the setting change is completed.

In addition, since the first notification is continued even when the cause of a certain error is partially eliminated, it is possible to notify that the certain error has not been completely eliminated, and the second Since the notification is terminated, it is possible to notify that the state has changed in relation to a certain error, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of the store clerk or the like.

In addition, in the slot machine 100, when the setting value is changeable and the door is open (first case), a notification sound is output to indicate that the setting value is changeable. Instead, it starts outputting a notification sound indicating that the door is open.

The state shown in FIG. 67(c) is a state in which the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, so a setting change notification sound (in this example, " The speaker 272, 277 outputs an opening notification sound (in this example, the sound "the door is open") indicating that the door is open without starting to output the sound "The setting is being changed"). Output from

According to this example, when the door is opened during the setting change, the notification sound indicating the door opening is output while the setting change notification sound is not output. A store clerk or the like in a game store can surely know that the door is open.

In addition, when the door is opened while the settings are being changed, a notification sound indicating that the settings are being changed is not output, but a display indicating that the settings are being changed is displayed. can be grasped.

<Hopper error notification/setting change mode (door open → door closed)>
The state shown in FIG. 67(d) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state while the setting key remains on after shifting to the setting change mode.

In the same state, a hopper error (some error) continues, but in this example, even if a hopper error (some error) state) is maintained (setting change takes precedence over notification of a certain error), a setting change indication indicating that the setting value can be changed (in this example, "setting change in progress"). display of a character string) is changed to a second display mode (in this example, a setting screen that allows the operation check to be started ( It is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 in the display mode) including the operation check setting screen).

In the same state, the front door 102 is closed in the setting change mode, so a setting change notification sound (in this example, "setting is being changed") indicates that the setting value can be changed. !”) is output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

As described with reference to FIGS. 67(c) and (d), according to this example, in the door open state during setting change, the notification sound during setting change is not output, while the door closing sound during setting change is not output. To provide a game machine having a characteristic informing means, in which a notification sound is output during setting change in the state, so that the state of door opening and door closing can be interlocked with the presence or absence of notification sound during setting change. can do. In the open state, a notification sound indicates that the door is open while the settings are being changed (there is a possibility that the settings are being changed or that a fraudulent act is being carried out). etc., and when the door is closed, it is possible to reliably notify the store clerk or the like that the setting change has not been completed by the notification sound.

In addition, in the setting change mode of this example, a setting screen (operation check setting screen) for starting the operation check is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 . A store clerk or the like can arbitrarily select any one of the speaker check, accessory check, and effect button check on the setting screen by operating the cross key 193 (operation means). Needless to say, items that can be selected in the setting change mode are not limited to this example.

<Error notification of hopper error / Setting change mode (door closed → door open)>
The state shown in FIG. 67(e) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the closed state to the open state while the setting key is kept ON after shifting to the setting change mode.

This state is a state in which the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, so a setting change notification sound (in this example, "setting is being changed") indicates that the setting value can be changed. Without starting the output of the door, the opening notification sound (in this example, the sound "the door is open") indicating that the door is open is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the upper part The lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are flashed in red to notify that the front door 102 is open (open notification).

Note that the effect button 192 is a means that functions as an operation means in various settings and the like, and is a means that functions as a notification means that can be notified. operation as is disabled.

In addition, since this state is a state in which the front door 102 is opened in the setting change mode, the display including the setting changing display (in this example, the display of the character string "setting changing") is displayed in the second mode. It is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 in one display mode (in this example, a display mode in which a character string "setting change in progress" is arranged in the center of a yellow background image).

<Error notification of hopper error/setting change mode (door open)/setting change operation>
The state shown in FIG. 67(f) is the state in which the setting value is being changed, and the state shown in FIG. 68(a) is the state in which the setting value is confirmed and the setting change is completed.

In the state shown in FIG. 67(f), while the set values are displayed on the payout number display 127, the currently set set values 1 to 6 are detected each time the operation means (setting switch) is pressed once. is added and updated by 1 to change the setting value from setting 1 to setting 6, and when a pressing operation by the operation means (in this example, the start lever 135) is received, the setting value is fixed to setting 6 do.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 68(a), since the setting value has been confirmed and the setting change has been completed, the setting changing display is ended, and the setting change indicating that the setting value has been confirmed and the setting change has been completed. A completion display (in this example, a screen in which a character string “setting change completed” is arranged in the center of a yellow background image) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 .

<Error notification of hopper error/setting change mode (door open)/end of setting change>
The state shown in FIG. 68(b) is a state in which a certain operation by the setting key is canceled (the setting key is pulled out after an operation to turn the setting key from on to off is performed) and the setting change mode is terminated.

In the same state, the hopper error (certain error) continues, and the setting change mode (the state in which the setting value can be changed) ends, so the first notification (in this example, the payout number display 127) and the second notification (in this example, the hopper error notification by the segment f of the main board display 190).

The states shown in FIGS. 68(b) to 68(d) are the same as the states described with reference to FIGS. 64(d) to 65(a). In the state shown in 68(b), since the hopper error (certain error) that occurred before the power was turned on continues, an error code (this example Then, by displaying "E4"), a hopper error notification (first notification) indicating that a hopper error has occurred is performed, and the segment f (second notification means) of the main board display 190 is lit in red to perform hopper error notification (second notification) indicating that a hopper error has occurred.

At the same time, an error display indicating that a hopper error has occurred is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. , since preparations such as initial setting are completed, the storage number display 125 is turned on.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 68(c), since the connection abnormality of the hopper error is resolved (the first condition is satisfied), the first notification (hopper error notification by the payout number indicator 127) is issued. While continuing, the second notification (hopper error notification by segment f of main board display 190) ends.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 68(d), since the reset button was operated to eliminate the hopper error (the second condition was satisfied), the segment a (the third By lighting the notification means) in red, a reset button operation notification (third notification) indicating that the reset button has been operated is performed, and a hopper error (a certain error) has been resolved by operating the reset button. Therefore, the first notification (hopper error notification by the payout number indicator 127) is terminated.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 68(e), since the opening/closing sensor detects the closing of the front door 102, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 announce the opening (blinking red), and the speaker 272, 277 output of an open notification sound (“the door is open”) output and the main board display 19 output of a door open error notification (segment e lights up in red), while the stored number display 125, The payout number indicator 127 continues to light and the liquid crystal display device 157 continues to display the normal screen, and the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 light up in the effect mode to indicate that the normal game can be started. Notify.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 20) has the first notification means (for example, the number of payouts shown in FIGS. 64(d) and (e)). indicator 127), second notification means (for example, segment f of the main board indicator 190 shown in FIG. 64(d)), and setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values. , wherein when the power is turned on in a state in which a certain operation is performed with a setting key, the setting value is changed to a changeable state, and the first notification means is: In at least a part of the period during which a certain error (for example, hopper error) occurs (or the entire period during which a certain error occurs), the first notification (for example, display of the number of payouts Hopper error notification by device 127), and the second notification means is means for at least a part of the period during which the certain error occurs (or when the certain error occurs is a means capable of initiating a second notification (e.g., a hopper error notification by segment f of the main board display 190), and the certain error indicates that the first condition is satisfied (e.g. hopper error connection failure is cleared) and then a second condition is met (e.g. reset button is operated or door reset is performed) and when the certain error occurs, at least the first notification and the second notification are started, and if the first condition is satisfied after that, the first notification is continued. , when the second notification is terminated, the power is turned off in the state where the certain error occurs, and the power is turned on in the state where the certain operation is performed by the setting key, the set value to a changeable state, and after changing the set value, the first notification and the second notification are started.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, the setting change is prioritized over the notification of a certain error, so the setting change can be surely completed, and the setting change can be prevented from being forgotten. In addition, since the first notification and the second notification are performed after the setting change is completed, it is possible to reliably handle the error after the setting change is completed.

In addition, since the first notification is continued even when the cause of a certain error is partially eliminated, it is possible to notify that the certain error has not been completely eliminated, and the second Since the notification is terminated, it is possible to notify that the state has changed in relation to a certain error, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of the store clerk or the like.

<Error notification/setting confirmation mode for hopper error>
Next, error notification of a hopper error when shifting to the setting confirmation mode will be described.

FIGS. 69(a) to 70(a) are diagrams showing an example of error notification of a hopper error in the case of shifting to the setting confirmation mode in chronological order.

<Error notification of hopper error / power on>
The state shown in FIG. 69(a) is a state in which a hopper error (certain error) occurs before the power is turned on.

In this state, since power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, the notification by the display means (liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, etc.), the notification by the light emission means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, etc.), None of the notification by the sound output means (speakers 277, 278) is performed.

The state shown in FIG. 69B is a state in which the front door 102 is opened by a store clerk or the like, and the power is turned on by operating the power switch arranged inside the main body 101 .

In this state, the power is supplied to the slot machine 100, and the open/close sensor detects the opening of the front door 102, so that the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 are flashed in red, so that the front door 102 is in an open state (open notification), and by lighting the segment e of the main board display 190 in red, a door open error notification indicating that the front door 102 is in an open state is provided. Then, the speakers 272 and 277 repeatedly output an opening notification sound (in this example, the sound "the door is open").

<Error notification of hopper error/start of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 69(c) is a state in which a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, and preparations such as initial setting have been completed.

Since the state shown in FIG. 69(c) is the same as the state described using FIG. 64(d), detailed description is omitted. error) continues, the payout number indicator 127 (first notification means) is used to display an error code ("E4" in this example), indicating that a hopper error has occurred. Hopper error notification (first notification) indicating that a hopper error has occurred by lighting the segment f (second notification means) of the main board display 190 in red. Notification (second notification) is performed.

At the same time, an error display indicating that a hopper error has occurred is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. , since preparations such as initial setting are completed, the storage number display 125 is turned on.

<Error notification of hopper error/Door open → Operate the setting key after turning on the power>
The state shown in FIG. 69(d) is a state in which an operation to turn the setting key from OFF to ON is performed while a hopper error (certain error) that occurred before power-on continues.

In the slot machine 100, if a certain error (in this example, a hopper error) occurs when a certain operation (turning from off to on) is performed by the setting key after the power is turned on, The certain error is prioritized, and the first notification (in this example, the hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) and the second notification (in this example, the hopper error notification by the segment f of the main board display 190) is executed, and a certain error is eliminated, it is possible to shift to a state in which setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode).

In the state shown in FIG. 69(d), a certain operation (turning from OFF to ON) was performed using the setting key, but in this example, a certain operation (turning ON from OFF) using the setting key was performed. If a hopper error (certain error) occurs when is performed, the hopper error (certain error) is prioritized, so the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). Instead, the hopper error notification (first notification) by the payout number display 127 and the hopper error notification (second notification) by the segment f of the main board display 190 are performed (continued).

According to this example, since the notification of a certain error is given priority over the setting confirmation, it is possible to quickly deal with the error, and the setting confirmation takes time after the error is dealt with. It is possible to prevent situations such as forgetting to confirm settings or forgetting set values.

<Error notification of hopper error/resolved connection error → end of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 69(e) is a state in which the hopper error connection abnormality is resolved (the first condition is satisfied).

Since the state shown in FIG. 69(e) is the same as the state explained using FIG. 64(d), detailed explanation is omitted. Since one condition is satisfied), the first notification (hopper error notification by payout number indicator 127) is continued, while the second notification (hopper error notification by segment f of main board display 190) exit.

According to this example, since the first notification is continued even when the cause of a certain error is partially eliminated, it is possible to notify that the certain error has not been completely eliminated. Since the second notification is terminated, it is possible to notify that the state has changed in relation to a certain error, thereby improving the work efficiency and convenience of game store clerks and the like.

In this state, the setting key remains on, but the hopper error has not been resolved, so the state in which the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode) is not entered.

<Error notification of hopper error/Reset button operation → Finish the first notification → Move to setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 69(f) is a state in which the reset button is operated (the first operation satisfies the second condition) to resolve a hopper error (certain error).

In the same state, since the reset button was operated to eliminate the hopper error (the second condition was satisfied), the segment a (third notification means) of the main board display 190 lights up in red. As a result, a reset button operation notification (third notification) indicating that the reset button has been operated is performed, and the first notification ( Hopper error notification by payout number indicator 127) is terminated.

In the same state, since the hopper error (certain error) has been resolved while the setting key is on, the state shifts to a state in which the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode), but the front door 102 is opened. Since the setting value is in a state where it is confirmed, the door body does not start outputting the setting confirmation sound (in this example, the sound "Setting confirmation is in progress") indicating that the setting value can be confirmed. The speakers 272 and 277 output an open notification sound indicating that the door is open (in this example, the sound "the door is open").

According to this example, when the door is opened during setting confirmation, the notification sound indicating that the door is open is output while the notification sound indicating that the setting is being confirmed is not output. A store clerk or the like in a game store can surely know that the door is open.

In addition, in the same state, a display including a setting confirmation display indicating that the setting value can be confirmed (in this example, the display of the character string "setting confirmation") is displayed in the third display mode (this In the example, it is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 in a display mode in which a character string "confirming settings" is arranged on the upper left of a gray background image.

According to this example, when the door is opened while the settings are being checked, the notification sound indicating that the settings are being checked is not output, but a display indicating that the settings are being checked is displayed. can be reliably grasped visually.

In addition, since this state is a state in which the front door 102 is open in the setting confirmation mode, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 blink in red to notify that the front door 102 is open ( open notification).

According to this example, the fact that the door is open during setting confirmation (that the setting is being confirmed or that there is a possibility that a fraudulent act, etc. etc., can be communicated with certainty.

<Error notification of hopper error / Solve hopper error → Close front door>
The state shown in FIG. 70(a) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed by an amusement store clerk or the like after the hopper error is resolved.

The state shown in FIG. 70(a) is the same as the state described with reference to FIG. 65(a), so a detailed description will be omitted. In the same state, the closing of the front door 102 was detected by the open/close sensor. Therefore, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the opening notification (red flashing) by the production button 192, the output of the opening notification sound (“the door is open”) by the speakers 272 and 277, and the main board display While ending the door open error notification by the device 19 (red lighting of the segment e), the storage number display 125, the payout number display 127 continue lighting, and the normal screen display by the liquid crystal display device 157 is continued. A lamp 142, a side lamp 144, and a performance button 192 are lit in a performance mode to notify that the normal game can be started.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 20) has the first notification means (for example, the number of payouts shown in FIGS. 64(d) and (e)). indicator 127), second notification means (for example, segment f of the main board indicator 190 shown in FIG. 64(d)), and setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values. , wherein when a certain operation is performed with a setting key after the power is turned on, the setting value is shifted to a state in which the setting value can be confirmed, and the first notification means In at least a part of the period during which an error (for example, a hopper error) occurs (or the entire period during which a certain error occurs), the first notification (for example, the payout number indicator 127 hopper error notification), and the second notification means is capable of starting at least a part of the period during which the certain error is occurring (or the period during which the certain error is occurring ), means capable of initiating a second annunciation (e.g., hopper error annunciation by segment f of main board indicator 190), said certain error being the first condition met ( For example, after the connection abnormality of the hopper error is resolved), the error is resolved when the second condition is met (for example, the reset button is operated or the door is reset). , when the certain error occurs, at least the first notification and the second notification are started, and if the first condition is satisfied after that, the first notification is continued; When the second notification is completed, the power is turned off in the state where the error occurs, and the power is turned on, the first notification is performed when the setting key is operated. After the second notification is performed and the certain error is resolved (for example, after all errors are resolved if multiple errors have occurred, or if multiple errors have occurred) The gaming machine is characterized in that it is possible (or always transitions) to a state in which the set values can be confirmed after a part of the error has been eliminated in the case where the set value is confirmed.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, since notification of a certain error is given priority over setting confirmation, it is possible to quickly deal with the error, and it is possible to take time after dealing with the error. Setting confirmation can be performed by the user, and situations such as forgetting to confirm the setting or forgetting the setting value can be prevented.

In addition, since the first notification is continued even when the cause of a certain error is partially eliminated, it is possible to notify that the certain error has not been completely eliminated, and the second Since the notification is terminated, it is possible to notify that the state has changed in relation to a certain error, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of the store clerk or the like.

<Modified example of setting change mode/setting change mode>
Next, the normal setting change mode will be described prior to the explanation of the modification of the setting change mode.

71(a) to 72(b) are diagrams showing an example of a setting change operation in the normal setting change mode in chronological order.

<Modified example of setting change mode/power-on with setting change>
The state shown in FIG. 52(a) is a state in which an error (for example, a hopper error) has not occurred before the power is turned on.

In this state, since power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, the notification by the display means (liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, etc.), the notification by the light emission means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, etc.), None of the notification by the sound output means (speakers 277, 278) is performed.

The state shown in FIG. 71(b) is a state in which the store clerk or the like opens the front door 102 and the power is turned on in a state where the setting key is turned on from off.

In this state, the power is supplied to the slot machine 100, and the open/close sensor detects the opening of the front door 102, so that the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 are flashed in red, so that the front door 102 is in an open state (open notification), and by lighting the segment e of the main board display 190 in red, a door open error notification indicating that the front door 102 is in an open state is provided. Then, the speakers 272 and 277 repeatedly output an opening notification sound (in this example, the sound "the door is open").

<Modified example of setting change mode/moving to setting change mode>
The state shown in FIG. 71(c) is a state in which the setting change mode is entered in a state in which a certain error (for example, a hopper error) has not occurred.

In the same state, since the setting change mode has been entered, a display including a setting changing display (in this example, a character string "setting changing" is displayed) indicating that the setting value can be changed, It is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 in the first display mode (in this example, the display mode in which the character string "setting change in progress" is arranged in the center of the yellow background image).

In addition, since the same state is the state in which the front door 102 is opened in the setting change mode, a setting change notification sound (in this example, "setting change in progress") indicates that the setting value can be changed. ”) is output from the speakers 272 and 277 to indicate that the door is in the open state (in this example, the sound “the door is open”).

<Modification of setting change mode / setting change mode (door open → door closed)>
The state shown in FIG. 71(d) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state while the setting key is kept ON after shifting to the setting change mode.

In this state, a display including a setting changing display (in this example, a character string "setting changing" is displayed) indicating that the setting value can be changed is displayed in the second display mode (in this example, , in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, in a display mode that includes a setting screen (operation check setting screen) that allows the operation check to be started, along with a character string "setting being changed" placed on the upper left of the green background image. indicate.

In the same state, the front door 102 is closed in the setting change mode, so a setting change notification sound (in this example, "setting is being changed") indicates that the setting value can be changed. !”) is output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

As described with reference to FIGS. 71(c) and (d), according to this example, in the door open state during setting change, the notification sound during setting change is not output, while the door closing sound during setting change is not output. To provide a game machine having a characteristic informing means, in which a notification sound is output during setting change in the state, so that the state of door opening and door closing can be interlocked with the presence or absence of notification sound during setting change. can do. In addition, in the door open state, a notification sound indicates that the door is open while the settings are being changed (there is a possibility that the settings are being changed or that fraudulent acts are being carried out). A store clerk or the like can be reliably notified, and in the door closed state, a store clerk or the like can be reliably notified by the notification sound that the setting change has not been completed.

In addition, in the setting change mode of this example, a setting screen (operation check setting screen) for starting the operation check is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 . A store clerk or the like can arbitrarily select any one of the speaker check, accessory check, and effect button check on the setting screen by operating the cross key 193 (operation means).

<Modification of setting change mode / setting change mode (door closed → door open)>
The state shown in FIG. 71(e) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the closed state to the open state while the setting key remains on after shifting to the setting change mode.

This state is a state in which the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, so a setting change notification sound (in this example, "setting is being changed") indicates that the setting value can be changed. Without starting the output of the door, the opening notification sound (in this example, the sound "the door is open") indicating that the door is open is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the upper part The lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are flashed in red to notify that the front door 102 is open (open notification).

In addition, since this state is a state in which the front door 102 is opened in the setting change mode, the display including the setting changing display (in this example, the display of the character string "setting changing") is displayed in the second mode. It is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 in one display mode (in this example, a display mode in which a character string "setting change in progress" is arranged in the center of a yellow background image).

<Modified example of setting change mode/setting change operation>
The state shown in FIG. 71(f) is a state in which setting values are being changed, and the state shown in FIG. 72(a) is a state in which setting values have been finalized and setting changes have been completed.

In the state shown in FIG. 71(f), while the set values are displayed on the payout number display 127, the currently set set values 1 to 6 are detected each time the operating means (setting switch) is pressed once. is added and updated by 1 to change the setting value from setting 1 to setting 6, and when a pressing operation by the operation means (in this example, the start lever 135) is received, the setting value is fixed to setting 6 do.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 72(a), since the setting value is confirmed and the setting change is completed, the setting changing display is ended, and the setting change indicating that the setting value is confirmed and the setting change is completed is displayed. A completion display (in this example, a screen in which a character string “setting change completed” is arranged in the center of a yellow background image) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 .

<Modified example of setting change mode/end of setting change mode>
In the state shown in FIG. 72(b), a certain operation by the setting key is canceled (the setting key is pulled out after the operation to turn the setting key from on to off is performed), the setting change mode is terminated, and the front door is opened. 102 is changed from the closed state to the open state.

In this state, since the opening/closing sensor detects the closing of the front door 102, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 notify the opening (blinking red), and the speakers 272 and 277 make the opening notification sound ("Door is open") and the door opening error notification by the main board display 19 (segment e lights up in red), while the stored number display 125 and the payout number display 127 light up and While continuing to display the normal screen by the liquid crystal display device 157, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are lit in the effect mode to notify that the normal game can be started.

<Modified example of setting change mode / setting confirmation mode>
Next, prior to explaining the modification of the setting change mode, the normal setting confirmation mode will be explained.

FIGS. 72(c) and 73(b) are diagrams showing an example of the setting confirmation operation in the normal setting confirmation mode in chronological order.

<Modified example of setting change mode / Operate the setting key after turning on the power>
The state shown in FIG. 72(c) is a state in which an error (for example, a hopper error) has not occurred before the power is turned on.

In this state, since power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, the notification by the display means (liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, etc.), the notification by the light emission means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, etc.), None of the notification by the sound output means (speakers 277, 278) is performed.

The state shown in FIG. 72(d) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened by a store clerk or the like, and the power is turned on by operating the power switch arranged inside the main body 101 .

In this state, the power is supplied to the slot machine 100, and the open/close sensor detects the opening of the front door 102, so that the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 are flashed in red, so that the front door 102 is in an open state (open notification), and by lighting the segment e of the main board display 190 in red, a door open error notification indicating that the front door 102 is in an open state is provided. Then, the speakers 272 and 277 repeatedly output an opening notification sound (in this example, the sound "the door is open").

<Modified example of setting change mode/moving to setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 72(e) is a state in which the setting confirmation mode has been entered.

In this state, since the front door 102 is open, a setting confirmation notification sound (in this example, "setting confirmation in progress") is output to indicate that the setting value can be confirmed. without starting, the speaker 272, 277 outputs an open notification sound indicating that the door is in the open state (in this example, the sound "the door is open").

According to this example, when the door is opened during setting confirmation, the notification sound indicating that the door is open is output while the notification sound indicating that the setting is being confirmed is not output. A store clerk or the like in a game store can surely know that the door is open.

In addition, in the same state, a display including a setting confirmation display indicating that the setting value can be confirmed (in this example, the display of the character string "setting confirmation") is displayed in the third display mode (this In the example, it is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 in a display mode in which a character string "confirming settings" is arranged on the upper left of a gray background image.

According to this example, when the door is opened while the settings are being checked, the notification sound indicating that the settings are being checked is not output, but a display indicating that the settings are being checked is displayed. can be reliably grasped visually.

In addition, since this state is a state in which the front door 102 is open in the setting confirmation mode, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 blink in red to notify that the front door 102 is open ( open notification).

According to this example, the fact that the door is open during setting confirmation (that the setting is being confirmed or that there is a possibility that a fraudulent act, etc. etc., can be communicated with certainty.

<Modification of setting change mode / end of setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 73(a) is a state in which a certain operation by the setting key is canceled (the setting key is pulled out after an operation to turn the setting key from on to off is performed), and the setting confirmation mode is terminated. The state shown in FIG. 4B is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the closed state to the open state.

In the state shown in FIG. 73(a), since the setting confirmation mode has ended, the stored number display 125 and the payout number display 127 are lit and the normal screen is displayed by the liquid crystal display device 157, while the front door 102 is in an open state, an open notification sound (in this example, the sound "the door is open") is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, production button 192 blinks in red to notify that the front door 102 is open (open notification).

In the state shown in FIG. 73(b), the closing of the front door 102 is detected by the open/close sensor. While ending the output of the opening notification sound (“the door is open”) and the notification of the door opening error by the main board display 19 (the red lighting of the segment e), the stored number display 125, the payout number Lighting of the display 127 and display of the normal screen by the liquid crystal display device 157 are continued, and the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are lighted in the effect mode to notify that the normal game can be started. conduct.

<Modified example of setting change mode / Setting change mode by operating setting keys after power-on>
Next, a setting change mode by operating setting keys after power-on will be described.

FIGS. 73(c) to 74(f) are diagrams showing an example of setting change modes by operating setting keys after power-on in chronological order.

<Setting change mode by operating setting keys after power-on>
The state shown in FIG. 73(a) is a state in which a hopper error (certain error) occurs before the power is turned on.

In this state, since power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, the notification by the display means (liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, etc.), the notification by the light emission means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, etc.), None of the notification by the sound output means (speakers 277, 278) is performed.

The state shown in FIG. 73(b) is a state in which the store clerk opens the front door 102 and the power is turned on, and the state shown in FIG. , in which an operation has been performed to turn the setting key from off to on.

When the slot machine 100 is powered off with an error (hopper error in this example) occurring, and the error is not resolved when the power is turned on (first case), After the power is turned on, a certain operation (this In the example, when an operation of turning the setting key from off to on is performed, the setting value is changed (setting change mode).

In the state shown in FIG. 73(b), the power is supplied to the slot machine 100, and the open/close sensor detects that the front door 102 is open. By doing so, it is notified that the front door 102 is open (open notification), and by lighting the segment e of the main board display 190 in red, it is indicated that the front door 102 is open. The door opening error notification shown in FIG.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 73(c), since the setting key has been turned on from off before the error notification of the hopper error is started, the setting change mode is entered.

According to this example, it is possible to change the setting value even after the power is turned on.

The states shown in FIGS. 74(a) to 74(f) are almost the same as the states described with reference to FIGS. The state shown in FIG. 74(a) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the closed state to the open state while the setting key is kept on after shifting to the setting change mode.

This state is a state in which the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, so a setting change notification sound (in this example, "setting is being changed") indicates that the setting value can be changed. Without starting the output of the door, the opening notification sound (in this example, the sound "the door is open") indicating that the door is open is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the upper part The lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are flashed in red to notify that the front door 102 is open (open notification).

In addition, since this state is a state in which the front door 102 is opened in the setting change mode, the display including the setting changing display (in this example, the display of the character string "setting changing") is displayed in the second mode. It is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 in one display mode (in this example, a display mode in which a character string "setting change in progress" is arranged in the center of a yellow background image).

The state shown in FIG. 74(b) is a state in which setting values are being changed, and the state shown in FIG. 74(c) is a state in which setting values have been finalized and setting changes have been completed.

In the state shown in FIG. 74(b), while the set values are displayed on the payout number display 127, the currently set set values 1 to 6 are detected each time the operating means (setting switch) is pressed once. is added and updated by 1 to change the setting value from setting 1 to setting 6, and when a pressing operation by the operation means (in this example, the start lever 135) is received, the setting value is fixed to setting 6 do.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 74(c), since the setting value has been confirmed and the setting change has been completed, the setting changing display is ended, and the setting change indicating that the setting value has been confirmed and the setting change has been completed. A completion display (in this example, a screen in which a character string “setting change completed” is arranged in the center of a yellow background image) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 .

The state shown in FIG. 74(d) is a state in which a certain operation by the setting key is canceled (the setting key is pulled out after an operation to turn the setting key from on to off is performed), and the setting change mode is finished.

In the same state, the hopper error (certain error) continues, and the setting change mode (the state in which the setting value can be changed) ends, so the first notification (in this example, the payout number display 127) and the second notification (in this example, the hopper error notification by the segment f of the main board display 190).

At the same time, an error display indicating that a hopper error has occurred is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. , since preparations such as initial setting are completed, the storage number display 125 is turned on.

According to this example, since the error state is entered after the setting change operation is completed, the user does not forget to deal with the error due to the setting change operation, and the error is surely eliminated before the game is started. be able to.

In the state shown in FIG. 74(e), since the connection abnormality of the hopper error is resolved (the first condition is satisfied), the first notification (hopper error notification by the payout number indicator 127) is continued. On the other hand, the second notification (the hopper error notification by the segment f of the main board display 190) ends.

In the state shown in FIG. 74(f), the reset button is operated to resolve the hopper error (the second condition is satisfied), and the hopper error (certain error) is resolved. (Hopper error notification by payout number indicator 127) is terminated. In the same state, since the opening/closing sensor detects the closing of the front door 102, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 announce the opening (flashes in red), and the speakers 272 and 277 make the opening announcement sound ( While ending the output of the voice "the door is open") and the door opening error notification by the main board display 19 (the red lighting of the segment e), the stored number display 125 and the payout number display 127 Lighting and display of the normal screen by the liquid crystal display device 157 are continued, and the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are lit in the effect mode to notify that the normal game can be started.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 or pachinko machine shown in FIG. 20) includes notifying means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157, the payout number display 127, the accumulated number display 125). , speakers 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight 148, effect button 192, stop buttons 137-139, start lever 135, etc.), and one of a plurality of set values can be set. and a setting means, wherein the notification means is a first notification (for example, by the payout number display 127) indicating that at least a certain error (for example, a hopper error) has occurred Hopper error notification, hopper error notification by segment f of the main board display 190) can be started. is not resolved (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), and when the power is turned on while a setting key is operated (for example, an operation to turn it on from off) is in a state in which the setting value can be changed (for example, setting change mode), and when the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on, the state in which the setting value can be confirmed (for example, setting confirmation mode) is entered. mode), and in the first case, when the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on and before the first notification is started, the set value becomes changeable. It is a game machine characterized in that it shifts (or can shift).

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change the setting value even after the power is turned on, so that the convenience of the store clerk or the like in the amusement parlor can be improved.

Further, in the first case, when the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on and after the first notification is started, the setting value can be changed. The setting value may not be changed to the checkable state, but an error state may occur, and when the error state is resolved, the setting value may be changed to the checkable state.

With such a configuration, since the game cannot be started unless the error is resolved, the error can be reliably resolved, and the set value can be confirmed before the game is started.

Further, in the first case, when the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on and before the first notification is started, the setting value is changed to a changeable state. , the error state may be entered after the setting change operation is completed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably eliminate the error before starting the game without forgetting to deal with the error due to the work of changing the setting.

In the first case, when the power is turned on while the certain operation is performed, the setting value is changed to a changeable state, and after the setting change operation is completed, the error state is entered. It may be transferred.

With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably eliminate the error before starting the game without forgetting to deal with the error due to the work of changing the setting.

In addition, the power is cut off in a state where an error other than the certain error (for example, an error that can be resolved by changing the settings (medal insertion error 2, etc.)) is occurring, and after the power is turned on, the If the certain operation is performed before the first notification is started, the setting value is changed to a changeable state, and after the setting change operation is completed (or the setting value is changeable state (after completion of the game) without transitioning to the error state, the transition to a state in which the game can be played may be made.

With such a configuration, when a minor error or an error that can be resolved by changing settings occurs, the game can be progressed without transitioning to an error state, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased. can.

Also, when the power is turned on, the power is cut off in a state where an error different from the above-mentioned error (for example, an error that can be resolved by changing the settings (medal insertion error 2, etc.)) is occurring, and the above-mentioned certain operation is performed. When the power is turned on with It may be such that the game can be played without transitioning to the error state.

With such a configuration, when a minor error or an error that can be resolved by changing settings occurs, the game can be progressed without transitioning to an error state, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased. can.

In addition, the certain error is an error that cannot be resolved by changing settings and confirming settings (for example, hopper empty error, hopper error, medal insertion error 1 (medal insertion jam), medal payout error 1 (medal payout jam), medal payout error 3 (fraudulent payout), overflow abnormality). Further, the other error may be an error that can be resolved by changing settings (for example, RAM failure (RWM failure), winning failure (winning design failure), backup failure). Also, the other error may be an error that cannot be resolved by checking the settings.

Here, the setting change includes an operation using the setting key (for example, an operation to turn it on from off).
If the power is turned on in a state where the An error that can be resolved by changing the setting is an error that occurs when the setting value is changed (or when the setting value is not changed) after transitioning to a state in which the setting value can be changed. This error is resolved when the state in which the value can be changed ends (when a certain operation is canceled).

Also, the game machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one in which balls enclosed in the game machine are circulated. Further, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to allow two-way communication. good. Further, while bi-directional communication is enabled between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Moreover, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. are not limited to those listed. Further, by applying the content described in one configuration among the multiple configurations described in the embodiments to another configuration, the width of the game may be expanded.

100 slot machine 110, 111, 112 reel 113 reel window 123 notification lamp 127 payout number display 130, 131, 132 medal insertion button 135 start lever 137, 138, 139 stop button 157 effect image display device 192 effect button 272, 277 speaker 300 main control unit 400 first sub-control unit 500 second sub-control unit

Claims (2)

a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are applied and driven to rotate ;
a plurality of operating means provided at positions operable by the player;
an informing means capable of executing the first informing;
A game machine equipped with an announcement means capable of executing an announcement,
The plurality of operating means are stop operation receiving means capable of receiving a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels,
the first notification is a notification suggesting an operation recommended for operation of the plurality of operation means;
The notification means is means for starting the first notification in a game in which an operation different from the recommended operation is performed,
The notification means is means for starting the first notification in relation to the first stopping operation of the plurality of reels,
The notifying means is means for terminating the first notifying in relation to the fact that all of the plurality of reels have been stopped,
There is a case where the first notification is started in the game in which the notice is started (hereinafter referred to as "first case"),
The notice means is a means for continuously executing the notice that has been executed in the first case even after the first notice is started ,
In the first case, the notification means, after the first notification is started, when the power is cut off while at least one of the plurality of reels is rotating, and then the power is restored (hereinafter referred to as , referred to as "second case"), means for resuming the first notification in at least a part of the period from the power-off game to the next game input operation,
A playground characterized by: The game machine according to claim 1 ,
In the second case, the first notification is resumed in relation to the final stop operation performed on the plurality of reels,
A playground characterized by:

Images